Download Stage Piano - Musikhaus Kirstein

High Performance
Stage Piano
Inhaltsverzeichnis
Willkommen!
5
Hauptfunktionen!
5
Pflege Ihres digitalen Pianos!
6
Auspacken!
7
Aufbau Ihres Pianos!
8
Einschalten!
8
Kopfhörer!
9
Anschließen des Pedals!
9
Anschließen von Audio-Geräten!
10
Anschließen anderer Laufwerke!
11
Local Control On/Off!
12
Bedienfeld und Anschlüsse!
12
Performance-Bildschirm!
14
Anpassen der Lautstärke!
15
Gesamtlautstärke!
15
Lautstärke für die Begleitautomatik!
15
VP-Player!
Installation von Systemdaten!
Auswahl der Sounds (Voices)!
15
16
18
Voice-Arten!
18
Übersicht über die Voices!
19
GM Voice!
19
Lautstärke der Main-Voice!
20
Layer!
20
Spielen mit einer Layer-Voice!
20
Einstellen der Lautstärke im Pop-Up-Fenster!
21
Einstellen der Lautstärke mit den Tasten Layer Volume + und -!
21
Ändern der Pedalfunktion!
21
Ändern der Oktaveinstellung der Layer-Voice!
22
Split!
22
Spielen mit einer Split-Voice!
22
Ändern des Split Points!
23
Einstellen der Lautstärke im Pop-Up-Fenster!
23
Einstellen der Lautstärke mit den Tasten Split Volume + und -!
24
Lautstärke der Main-Voice!
24
Ändern der Pedalfunktion!
24
Ändern der Oktaveinstellung!
24
Reverb (Hall)!
24
Spielen mit Reverb!
24
Auswahl eines Reverbs!
25
Einstellen des Reverb-Levels!
25
Einstellen des Reverb-Levels für einzelne Instrumente!
25
Effekt!
26
Spielen mit Effekt!
26
Auswahl eines Effekts!
26
Einstellen des Effekt-Levels!
27
Einstellen des Effekt-Levels für einzelne Instrumente!
27
Metronom!
28
Pitchbender!
28
Setup !
29
Tune!
29
Transposition!
29
Oktaveinstellung!
30
Brilliance!
30
Ändern des Pitchbend-Bereichs!
31
Pedalfunktionen!
31
Touch!
31
Begleitautomatik!
32
Auswahl des Rhythmus!
33
Übersicht über die Rhythmus-Styles!
33
Einstellen des Tempos!
33
Lautstärke der Begleitautomatik!
34
Spielen mit Begleitautomatik!
34
Benutzen der Begleitautomatik!
35
Einstellen des Begleit-Modus!
36
Die verschiedenen Begleit-Modi!
36
Ändern des Split Points!
38
Aufnahme!
39
Aufnehmen eines Songs!
39
Playback!
40
Sichern eines Songs!
40
Laden eines Songs von der SD-Karte!
41
Registration!
42
Aufrufen einer Registration!
42
Speichern einer Registration!
42
Speichern einer Registration auf eine SD-Karte!
42
Laden einer Registration von der SD-Karte!
43
SMF-Player!
Abspielen eines MIDI-Files!
43
44
Local Control (versteckte Funktion)!
44
Liste der General MIDI Voices und Drums!
45
MIDI Implementierung!
48
VP-Songs!
49
Hilfe bei Störungen!
71
Spezifikationen!
71
Willkommen
Danke und herzlichen Glückwunsch zum Kauf des High Performance Stage Pianos. Ihr
neues Piano bietet eine Vielzahl von Spezifikationen in einem kompakten Gehäuse.
Ebenso wie die High End-Modelle bietet es 128-Polyphonie, eine neue, weiterentwickelte
Hammermechanik (ARHA3), nützliche externe Speichermöglichkeiten (SD-Karte), USB
MIDI-Interface und hunderte von Sounds und Rhythmusstyles.
Sein modernes und stylisches Design mit Hochglanzfinish passt zu fast allen
Einrichtungsstilen und durch seine kompakte Bauweise findet es leichter Platz als
traditionelle Klaviere oder große Digitalpianos.
Hauptfunktionen
128 Sounds (Voices)
Das Piano umfasst eine weite Auswahl an Sounds, inklusive Stereo-Piano und
Synthesizer-Sounds, Drumsets u.v.a. Es verfügt über digitale Effekte, mit denen Sie die
Klangcharakteristiken der Sounds regeln können.
VP Player System
Das Piano kommt mit über 1000 VP-Musikstücken, die Sie entweder zu Ihrem Vergnügen
anhören können oder die Sie zum Üben verwenden können.
MIDI-File System mit SD-Speicherkarte
Das Piano kann Standard-MIDI-Files abspielen, die Sie von Ihrem Computer auf die SDKarte Ihres Pianos laden können.
Begleitautomatik
Spielen Sie einfach einen Akkord und die Begleitautomatik liefert passenden Rhythmus,
Bass und Chords.
Registration-Memory
In diesem Speicher werden die Einstellungen des Pianos gesichert, damit Sie sie aufrufen
können, wann immer Sie möchten.
Aufnahmefunktion und Playback
Diese Funktion ermöglicht die Aufnahme Ihres Spiels, inklusive der Begleitautomatik in
Echtzeit.
USB-Port
Diese Buchse bietet eine schnelle und einfache Verbindungsmöglichkeit zu Ihrem
Computer.
&DUHRI\RXU'LJLWDO3LDQR
&DUHRI\RXU'LJLWDO3LDQR
&DUHRI\RXU'LJLWDO3LDQR
Pflege Ihres digitalen Pianos
&DUHRI\RXU'LJLWDO3LDQR
&DUHRI\RXU'LJLWDO3LDQR
&DUHRI\RXU'LJLWDO3LDQR
Vermeiden Sie Hitze, Feuchtigkeit oder direktes Sonnenlicht.
Ǹ
Ǹ7DNHFDUHQRWWRGURSWKHXQLWDQGDYRLG
7DNHFDUHQRWWRGURSWKHXQLWDQGDYRLG
Ǹ
7DNHFDUHQRWWRGURSWKHXQLWDQGDYRLG
VWURQJLPSDFW
VWURQJLPSDFW
VWURQJLPSDFW
Ǹ
Ǹ$YRLGKHDWKXPLGLW\RUGLUHFWVXQOLJKW
$YRLGKHDWKXPLGLW\RUGLUHFWVXQOLJKW
Ǹ $YRLGKHDWKXPLGLW\RUGLUHFWVXQOLJKW
Ǹ.HHSWKHXQLWIUHHIURPOLTXLGVGXVWHWF
.HHSWKHXQLWIUHHIURPOLTXLGVGXVWHWF Ǹ
Ǹ
Ǹ1HYHUDWWHPSWWRPRGLI\DQ\SDUWVRIWKH
1HYHUDWWHPSWWRPRGLI\DQ\SDUWVRIWKH
Schützen Sie das Instrument vor Flüssigkeiten,
Staub, etc.
Ǹ .HHSWKHXQLWIUHHIURPOLTXLGVGXVWHWF
Ǹ
1HYHUDWWHPSWWRPRGLI\DQ\SDUWVRIWKH
XQLW
XQLW
XQLW
Ǹ'XULQJWKXQGHUVWRUPVWXUQWKHSURGXFWRII
'XULQJWKXQGHUVWRUPVWXUQWKHSURGXFWRII
Ǹ
Schalten Sie während eines Gewitters das Instrument aus und trennen Sie es von der
Ǹ
'XULQJWKXQGHUVWRUPVWXUQWKHSURGXFWRII
DQGGLVFRQQHFWWKHSOXJIURPWKHSRZHU
DQGGLVFRQQHFWWKHSOXJIURPWKHSRZHU
Steckdose.
DQGGLVFRQQHFWWKHSOXJIURPWKHSRZHU
Geben Sie Acht, dass Sie das Gerät nicht fallen lassen.
WF
Ǹ 1HYHUDWWHPSWWRPRGLI\DQ\SDUWVRIWKH
XQLWVersuchen Sie niemals, irgendwelche Veränderungen an Teilen des Pianos vorzunehmen.
Unpacking
Unpacking
Unpacking
Unpacking
Carefully remove the digital piano and its accessories from the packing box. The digital piano set
II
Auspacken
consists of the following items.
Carefully remove the digital piano and its accessories from the packing box. The digital piano set
consists of the following items.
Nehmen Sie das Piano und sein Zubehör vorsichtig aus der Verpackung. Das digitale
Unpacking
Piano
besteht aus folgenden Teilen:
Main Unit
acking
Main Unit
Haupteinheit
e the digital piano and its accessories from the packing box. The digital piano set
ollowing items.
Unpacking
Notenständer
Music Stand
Music Stand
Non-Slip Pedal
AC Adapter
Non-Slip Pedal
AC Adapter
SD Card
SD Card
accessories from the packing box. The digital piano set
nd
Manual
dal
oth
Pedal
Owner's
Non-SlipManual
Pedal
Owner's Manual
Cleaning
Cloth
AC
Adapter
Netzteil
Cleaning
Cloth
AC Adapter
SD Card
Cleaning Cloth
SD Card
Inspect each item carefully to make sure that it is in good condition. If you find any item missing or damaged,
contact the place of purchase immediately for replacement.
Inspect each item carefully to make sure that it is in good condition. If you find any item missing or damaged,
contact the place of purchase immediately for replacement.
SD-Karte
em carefully to make sure that it is in good condition. If you find any item missing or damaged,
of purchase immediately for replacement.
4
4
pter
nual
Music Stand
SD Card
Non-Slip Pedal
Owner's
Manual
Cleaning Cloth
Bedienungsanleitung
Non-Slip Pedal
AC Adapter
AC Adapter
SD Card
SD Card
Reinigungstuch
Cleaning
Cloth
Inspect
each item
carefully to make sure that it is in good condition. If you find any item missing or damaged,
ou find any
item missing
or damaged,
contact the place of purchase immediately for replacement.
Überprüfen
alle
Bestandteile
und stellen Sie sicher, dass sie in Ordnung sind. Sollten
m carefully to make
sure that it is inSie
good
condition.
If you find any
4 item missing or damaged,
purchase immediately
replacement.
Teile for
fehlen
oder beschädigt sein, kontaktieren Sie bitte umgehend Ihren Händler.
Aufbau Ihres Pianos
Einschalten
4
1. Verbinden Sie das Netzteil zuerst mit dem Piano, dann
mit einer geeigneten Steckdose.
2. Drücken Sie POWER. Das Gerät wird eingeschaltet
und das Display geht an. Als Sound ist automatisch
„Grand Piano“ ausgewählt.
3. Sie können die Lautstärke mit dem Regler VOLUME
einstellen.
4. Drücken Sie abermals POWER um das Gerät wieder
auszuschalten.
HEADPHONE
Kopfhörer
Connect a set of stereo headphones(optional) to
HEADPHONE jack (standard 1/4" phone jacks).
Insert the headphone plug into the HEADPHONE jack
Schließen
einen
an der Buchse
on
the bottomSie
panel
of theStereo-Kopfhörer
piano.
PHONES
an
der
Unterseite
des
Pianos
an. Wenn ein
When headphones are connected, the internal speaker
Kopfhörer
angeschlossen
system
is automatically
shut off. ist, wird das interne
Lautsprechersystem automatisch abgeschaltet. Das Piano
Since
the über
piano zwei
has two
HEADPHONE jacks, two
verfügt
Kopfhörerbuchsen,
so sets
dass zwei
of headphones can be used simultaneously, allowing
Kopfhörer gleichzeitig angeschlossen werden können.
two people to enjoy listening to the performance.
SIDE PANEL
Anschließen des Pedals
5
Schließen Sie das Pedalkabel zuerst am Pedal an, dann an der entsprechenden Buchse
am Piano. Wenn Sie das Pedal anschließen oder entfernen, stellen Sie bitte sicher, dass
das Piano ausgeschaltet ist.
Sustain
Mit Piano-Sounds funktioniert das Pedal wie bei einem akustischen Piano, mit OrganSounds klingen die Töne so lange bis das Pedal wieder losgelassen wird.
Programmierbares Pedal
Das Pedal kann mit folgenden Funktionen belegt werden (siehe auch Kapitel „Pedal“).
1. Sustain: Das Pedal lässt die Töne ausklingen, also ob Sie die Tasten gedrückt halten
würden, ähnlich wie be einem akustischen Piano.
2. Soft: Wenn Sie das Pedal betätigen, klingen die Töne sanfter.
3. Sostenuto: Das Pedal erzeugt einen sustainartigen Effekt, d.h. die Töne klingen länger.
Der Effekt bezieht sich jedoch nur auf bereits gespielte Töne. Töne, die Sie nach dem
Drücken des mittleren Pedals spielen, sind davon nicht betroffen.
4. Rhythm Fill 1/Synchro Start Pedal: Das Pedal übernimmt die gleiche Funktion wie die
Taste FILL1/SYNCHRO.
5. Rhythm Fill 2/Synchro Start Pedal: Das Pedal übernimmt die gleiche Funktion wie die
Taste FILL2/SYNCHRO.
6. Rhythm Start/Stop Pedal: Das Pedal übernimmt die gleiche Funktion wie die Taste
START/STOP.
7. Setup Keypad Function Pedal: Das Pedal übernimmt die gleiche Funktion wie die Taste
SETUP/KEYPAD.
Anschließen von Audio-Geräten
a) Line In-Buchsen (L/Mono and R)
An diesen Stereo-Eingangsbuchsen können mit Hilfe von entsprechenden Audiokabeln
externe Instrumente angeschlossen werden, so dass der Sound dieser Instrumente über
die Lautsprecher des Pianos wiedergegeben werden kann.
Bitte beachten Sie, dass Sie zuerst das externe Gerät anschalten und dann erst das
Piano. Beim Ausschalten der Geräte gehen Sie bitte umgekehrt vor.
b) Line Out-Buchsen (L/Mono and R)
Wenn diese Buchsen verbunden sind, können Sie mit Hilfe des Reglers VOLUME die
Lautstärke des ausgehenden Soundsignals einstellen. Sie können beispielsweise aktive
Lautsprecher anschließen. Bei Anschluss eines Mono-Gerätes benutzen Sie bitte die
Buchse L/Mono.
Setting Up Your Piano
AnschließenOther
anderer
Laufwerke
Connecting
Devices
SIDE PANEL
Connecting the external MIDI devices (MIDI Terminals)
c)
Anschluss
von
externen
MIDI-Geräten
Use the built-in MIDI
terminals
and standard
MIDI cables to connect external MIDI devices.
Sie
mit Hilfe
Standard-MIDI-Kabeln
an diesen Buchsen MIDI-Laufwerke
MIDIkönnen
IN
Receives
MIDI von
messages
from an external MIDI device.
MIDI OUT Transmits
MIDI messages
by the instrument.
anschließen.
Die Buchse
MIDIgenerated
In empfängt
Daten von externen Geräten, die Buchse MIDI
What's
MIDI? MIDI-Daten, die vom Piano generiert werden.
Out
sendet
MIDI(Musical Instrument Digital Interface) is the international standard for digital communication of electronic musical
instrument data.
This
means
that any equipment
that has a MIDI
terminal
(such as electronic
instruments or personal computers
) can
MIDI
(Musical
Instrument
Digital
Interface)
istmusical
ein internationales
Standardformat
easily exchange digital data with other MIDI equipment without complicated conversions or connections.
für die
Kommunikation zwischen elektronischen Musikinstrumenten. Das bedeutet, dass alle
Geräte, die über ein MIDI-Terminal verfügen, z.B. elektronische Instrumente oder
Connecting
a computer
(USB Terminal)
Computer,
ganz
einfach untereinander
Daten austauschen können, ohne sie umständlich
By
connecting
a
computer
to
the
USB,
you
can
transfer
data between the instrument and the
konvertieren zu müssen.
computer via MIDI, and take advantage of sophisticated computer music programs. Keep in
mind that you also need to install an appropriate USB MIDI driver.
The instructions below explain how to connect and use the terminals.
d)CAUTION
Anschluss eines Computers
This
instrument
be connected
with both
USBUSB
terminalanschließen,
and MIDI Terminals. können
Wenn Siecannot
einen
Computer
über
Sie MIDI-Daten zwischen
CAUTION - Precautions when using the USB terminal.
Piano
und
Computer
austauschen
und
so
die
Vorteile
einer
Musik-Software nutzen. Bitte
When connecting the computer to the USB terminal, make sure to observe the following points. Failing to do so risks
freezing
the computer
corrupting
or losingeinen
data. If the
computer or the instrument
freezes, turn the power
to the
beachten
Sie, and
dass
Sie dazu
entsprechenden
USB-MIDITreiber
installiert
haben
instrument off and restart the computer.
müssen.
Before connecting the computer to the USB terminal, exit from any power-saving mode of the computer (such as
suspended, sleep, standby), and quit any open application software, also turns off the power to the instrument.
Execute the following before turning the power to the instrument off or unplugging the USB cable to/from the
Achtung: Sie können die MIDI-Buchsen und den USB-Port nicht gleichzeitig
instrument/computer.
- Quit any open application software on the computer.
- Make sure that data is not being transmitted from the instrument. (Data is transmitted only by playing notes on the
keyboard or playing back a song.)
- While a USB device is connected to the instrument, you should wait for six seconds or more between these operations:
When turning the power of the instrument off then on again, or when alternately connecting/disconnecting the USB
Vorsichtsmaßnahmen bei Benutzung des USB-Ports
cable.
benutzen.
Wenncontrol
Sie den
Computer
an der
USB-Buchse anschließen, beachten Sie bitte die
Local
On/Off
(Hidden
Function)
folgenden
Ein Nichtbeachten
dazu
führen,
dass der Computer abstürzt
Press
and holdHinweise.
down the KEYPAD
button and presskann
Right (C8)
key
of keyboards.
Under
Local control
off, the piano
doesn'tSollten
make any sound
without PC
connection(USB
or MIDI).
und
Daten
verloren
gehen.
trotzdem
Computer
oder
Piano abstürzen, schalten Sie
When you turn on the local control after using this function, the piano has previous setting values. (before the local control
bitte das Piano ab und starten Sie den Computer neu. Bevor Sie den Computer
off)
anschließen, beenden Sie bitte alle Stromsparmodi wie Ruhezustand oder Stand ByModus und beenden Sie offene Programme und schalten Sie das Piano aus.
Wenn Sie das USB-Kabel abziehen möchten,
führen Sie zuvor bitte folgende Maßnahmen
8
aus:
• Beenden Sie alle offenen Programme des Computers.
• Stellen Sie sicher, dass am Piano keine Daten übermittelt werden (Daten werden
übermittelt, indem Sie spielen oder ein Playback ablaufen lassen.)
• Wenn ein USB-Gerät an das Piano angeschlossen ist, sollten Sie zwischen folgenden
Maßnahmen mindestens 6 Sekunden warten: beim Ein- und Ausschalten des Pianos
und beim Ein- und Ausstecken eines Kabels.
Local Control On/Off
Hierbei handelt es sich um eine versteckte Funktion. Halten Sie die Taste KEYPAD
gedrückt und drücken Sie gleichzeitig die Taste RIGHT (C8) auf der Tastatur. In der
Funktion „Local Off“ erzeugt das Piano keine Töne ohne den Anschluss eines Computers
(USB oder MIDI). Wenn Sie diese Funktion benutzt haben, übernimmt das Piano die
Einstellungen, die Sie vor dem Benutzen dieser Funktion eingestellt hatten.
Panel controls and Terminals
Bedienfeld
und Anschlüsse
Panel Controls
and Terminals
G
E
D
C
B
A
F
VOLUME SECTION
SETUP SECTION
Page 12
MASTER VOLUME
Lautstärke
a) Master
Volume - Lautstärkeregler
STYLE
SECTION
GRAPHIC LCD DISPLAY
EXIT
ENTER
Page 32
AUTO ACMP.
DATA UP/DOWN
Style-Bereich
Page 34
INTRO/ENDING
SHIFT/KEYPAD
b) Auto Acmp - Begleitautomatik
Page 34
DISPLAY HOLD
c) START/STOP
Intro/Ending
Page 34
1/SYNC
TUNE
d)FILL
Start/Stop
Page
34
2/SYNC
TRANSPOSE
e)FILL
Fill 1/Sync
Page
33
TEMPO
UP
OCTAVE
f) Fill 2/Sync
Page 33
BRILLIANCE
g)TEMPO
TempoDOWN
+
Page 32
SELECT
KEYS
PITCH BEND
h)STYLE
Tempo
Page
35
i) ACMP.
Style-Select
Keys - Auswahltasten für Styles
MODE KEYS
TOUCH
j) ACMP.
Acmp.VOLUME
Mode Keys
der 33
Begleitautomatik
KEYS- ModusPage
PEDAL
k) BEAT
Acmp.
Volume Keys - Lautstärke
Page 27der Begleitautomatik
LED
REGISTRATION
l) METRONOME
Beat LED - Beat-Anzeige Page 27
m) Metronome
Setup
n) LCD-Display
9
Page 28
Page 28
Page 29
Page 29
Page 30
Page 31
Page 30
Page 42
o) Data +/p) Shift/Keypad
q) Display Hold
r) Tune
s) Transpose
t) Octave
u) Brilliance
v) Pitch Bend
w) Touch
x) Pedal
y) Registration
H
Panel controls and Terminals
I J
VOICE SECTION
Voice-Bereich
VOICE buttons
1) Voice-Knöpfe
LAYER
2) Layer
SPLIT
3) Split
REVERB
4) Reverb EFFECT
5) Effect
LAYER VOLUME KEYS
6) Layer Lautstärke
SPLIT VOLUME KEYS
7) Split Lautstärke
REVERB DEPTH KEYS
8) Reverb Level
9) Effekt LevelEFFECT DEPTH KEYS
PITCH
10) Pitch Bend
RadBEND WHEEL
Page 16
Page 18
Page 20
Page 23
Page 25
Page 19
Page 21
Page 24
Page 26
Page 27
POWER
A POWER switch
B DC IN
TERMINAL SECTION
C HEADPHONE
D USB IN
E MIDI IN/OUT
F SD CARD IN
G LINE IN
H LINE OUT
I ASSIGNABLE PEDAL IN
PLAYER SECTION
J DAMPER PEDAL IN
Player-Bereich
VP
PLAYER/SD
CARD
11) VP Player/SD-Karte
Page 13, 39, 42, 44
12) Record - Aufnahme
RECORD
Page 39
13) Play/StopPLAY/STOP
Page 13, 39, 44
14) Track 1/Repeat
Spur
1/Wiederholen
TRACK 1/REPEAT
Page 14, 39, 45
15) Track 2/All
TRACK 2/ALL
Page 14, 39, 45
10
Page 5
Page 5
Page 5
Page 8
Page 8
Page 12,44
Page 7
Page 7
Page 6
Page 6
Stromversorgung
A) Power - Einschaltknopf
B) DC In - Buchse für Netzteil
Anschlussfeld
C) Kopfhörer
D) USB-Buchse
E) MIDI In/Out
F) SD-Karte
G) Line In
H) Line Out
I) Assignable Pedal In - Buchse für programmierbares Pedal
J) Damper Pedal In - Pedalbuchse
nce Screen
Performance-Bildschirm
formance
Screen
irst turn on your
piano.Anzeige
The powererscheint,
up status screen
briefly
in the
display followed
Diese
wenn
Sie appears
Ihr Piano
anschalten.
Sie können die wichtigsten
ormance Screen. The performance screen shows you all of the most important playing
Parameter auf einen Blick einsehen.
A
B
D
C
F
E
G
H
ain Voice
A) Hier
der
aktuell
ausgewählte
angezeigt. Das Piano verfügt über 128
shows the selected
mainwird
voice.
There
are preset
128 voices inSound/Voice
this piano.
Voices.
yer Voice B) Hier wird die aktuell eingestellte Layer-Voice angezeigt, im Beispiel NONE (keine
ausgewählt).
shows the selected
layer voice.
C) Anzeige für die aktuelle Split-Voice, im Beispiel NONE (keine ausgewählt).
it Voice D) Der Split Point gibt den Teilungspunkt der Tastatur an, wenn Sie mit Split-Voice oder
shows the selected
split voice.
Begleitautomatik
spielen.
E) Anzeige für den gegenwärtig ausgewählten Rhythmus-Style. Das Piano verfügt über
it Point
80 Rhythmus-Styles.
n using the auto-accompaniment
or the split, the keyboard splits on this point.
F) Tempo
G) Name des Akkords, den Sie für die Begleitautomatik spezifiziert haben, z.B. C, Fm, G
ythm
H) Modus der Begleitautomatik
shows the selected rhythm style. There are 80 available rhythm styles.
mpo
Achtung: Wenn der Performance-Bildschirm oder ein Wert verändert wird, kann sich das
Tempo verlangsamen.
me of the Chord you specified for the Auto-Accompaniment
mple) C, Fm, G
to-Accompaniment mode
shows the selected auto-accompaniment mode.
performance screen or a value is changed, the tempo may go slow .
Adjusting the Volume
Adjusting the
Adjusting
the Volume
Volume
he piano has one volume knob on the panel for adjusting the volume.
he piano has one volume knob on the panel for adjusting the volume.
he Volume
MASTER
VOLUME
b on the panel
for adjusting the volume.
MASTER
VOLUME
his determines the entire volume of the piano.
Adjusting the Volume
Anpassen der Lautstärke
his determines the entire volume of the piano.
Gesamtlautstärke
me of the piano.
Adjusting the Volume
The piano has one volume knob on the panel for adjusting the volume.
Das Piano besitzt einen Knopf, mit dessen Hilfe Sie die Lautstärke
MASTER
VOLUME
anpassen
können.
Dies betrifft die gesamte Lautstärke des Pianos oder
This also determines the volume level of the HEADPHONE(s).
This
determines
the entire volume of the piano.
This also determines the volume level of theder
HEADPHONE(s).
Kopfhörer.
ACCOMPANIMENT
VOLUME
el of the HEADPHONE(s).
ACCOMPANIMENT
VOLUME
his determines the playback volume of the auto-accompaniment volume.
Lautstärke für die Begleitautomatik
his determines the playback volume of the auto-accompaniment volume.
OLUME
Call up the SETUP/KEYPAD mode.
1. Rufen Sie den Modus Setup/Keypad auf, indem Sie den entsprechenden Knopf
Call
theauto-accompaniment
SETUP/KEYPAD
mode.
This also
the volume
level in
of the
olume
ofhold
the
volume.
ress
andup
down
the SETUP/KEYPAD
button.
Thedetermines
setup pop-up
appears
theHEADPHONE(s).
LCD screen.
gedrückt
halten. Ein
Pop-Up-Fenster
erscheint
demscreen.
Display.
ess and hold down
the SETUP/KEYPAD
button.
The setup pop-up
appears inauf
the LCD
PAD mode.
ACCOMPANIMENT
VOLUME
P/KEYPAD button. The setup pop-up appears
in the LCD screen.
This determines the playback volume of the auto-accompaniment volume.
Call up the SETUP/KEYPAD mode.
Adjust the accompaniment volume.
Press and hold down the SETUP/KEYPAD button. The setup pop-up appears in the LCD screen.
Adjust
the accompaniment
volume.
djust
the accompaniment
volume by
using the ACCOMP VOLUME UP and DOWN keys .
djust the accompaniment volume by using the ACCOMP VOLUME UP and DOWN keys .
ment volume.
ume by using the ACCOMP VOLUME UP and
keys
.
2. DOWN
Stellen
Sie
die Lautstärke mit Hilfe der Tasten ACCOMP
VOLUME + oder - ein.
Adjust the accompaniment volume.
If you press both VOLUME UP and DOWN KeysAdjust
at the same
time
the accompaniment
volume by using the ACCOMP VOLUME UP and DOWN keys .
tomatically
return
the defaultUP
accompaniment
volume(85).
If you press
bothtoVOLUME
and DOWN Keys
at the same time
The range of
volume
is 0default
~ 100. accompaniment volume(85).
tomatically
return
the
Sie die Tasten + und - gleichzeitig drücken, wird die
•toWenn
Holdrange
the button
for
continuous
The
of volume
is 0 ~ 100. decrementing or incrementing.
nd
DOWN
Keys
at Lautstärke
the
time
It's
available
to adjust
eachsame
part volume
of accompaniment
independently.
der
Begleitung
auf die Werkseinstellung (85)
Hold
the button
for
continuous
decrementing
or incrementing.
ompaniment
volume(85).
ess
ENTER
button
in the
accomp
display.
It's the
available
to
adjustzurückgesetzt.
each
part
volumepop-up
of accompaniment
independently.
e cursor
movesbutton
on each
all parts)
of the
accompaniment.
ess
the ENTER
in part(or
the accomp
pop-up
display.
rementing
or accomp
incrementing.
Der
einstellbare
Bereich
geht
hen
pressing
volume
upallorparts)
downofkey,
the selected
partvon 0 bis 100.
e cursor
moves
on• each
part(or
theonly
accompaniment.
elume
of accompaniment
independently.
is adjusted.
hen
pressing
accomp
volume
up
or
down
key,
only
the
selected
part auch gedrückt halten um die
Sie können die Tasten If+you
oder
press- both
VOLUME UP and DOWN Keys at the same time
pop-up display. •
lume
is adjusted.
automatically
return to
default accompaniment volume(85).
gewünschte Einstellung
schneller
zutheerreichen.
arts) of the accompaniment.
The range of volume is 0 ~ 100.
down
key, onlyto
thethe
selected
part
Return
play
mode.
der
Begleitinstrumente
unabhängig
• Sie können die Lautstärke
Hold the
button
for continuous decrementing
or incrementing.
Return
to the
play mode.
elease
the SHIFT/KEYPAD
button.einstellen.It's available to adjust each part volume of accompaniment independently.
voneinander
Press the ENTER button in the accomp pop-up display.
elease the SHIFT/KEYPAD
Sie ENTER.The
Der
Cursor bewegt sich über die
• Drückenbutton.
cursor moves on each part(or all parts) of the accompaniment.
de.
Begleitinstrumente. Wenn
Sie accomp
nun +volume
oderup- ordrücken,
wird
nur die
When pressing
down key, only
the selected
part
tton.
12
volume
is
adjusted.
Lautstärke des ausgewählten Instruments verändert.
12
3. Lassen Sie die Taste SHIFT/KEYPAD
losmode.
um in den normalen Spielmodus
Return to the play
12
zurückzukehren. Release the SHIFT/KEYPAD button.
12
VP-Player
Ihr Piano verfügt über mehr als 1000 VP-Songs. Sie können diese Songs einfach zu Ihrem
Vergnügen anhören oder sie können mit ihnen üben.
1. Schieben Sie die SD Memory Card (SD-Karte) in den Kartenslot des Pianos.
• Der VP-Player arbeitet nur mit einer SD-Karte, die über Systemdaten verfügt.
Select a VP player music grou
Press the
VP PLAYER
button.
(The
pop
Select
a VP player
music
group
playerPress
button
willPLAYER
be on.)button.
Choose
the
de
the VP
(The
popand the
ENTER
button.
the pop-up
player
button
will be Then
on.) Choose
the des
• Benutzen Sie daher die mitgelieferte SD-Karte.
• Wenn Sie eine andere SD-karte benutzen und der VP-Player nicht funktioniert, müssen
VP
Player
Sie die Systemdaten auf der karte installieren.
VP Player
VP Player
Player
VP
Installation von Systemdaten
Formatieren Sie die Karte mit Ihrem Computer im Format FAT32
Laden Sie die Installationsdatei von unserer Homepage www.dynatone.biz
VP Player
Your piano comes with over 1000 VP tunes. You can playback VP player music for your own listening
Your
piano comes Sie
with overDatei
1000 VPauf
tunes.
can playback VP player music for your own listening
Installieren
derYou
Karte.
pleasure,
or you can usedie
them for practice.
and the ENTER button. Then the pop-up d
pleasure, or you can use them for practice.
Insert
the bundle SD keine
memory
card
into the
SD
card slot
on the
piano.
Piano
High
Speed
SD SD
Memory
Cards
(SDpiano.
HC).
VPDas
Player
Insert
theunterstützt
bundle SD memory
card
into the
card slot
on the
The VP player does not work without the SD memory card that has system data.
The
VP player
not
work
the SD
memory
card
that
hasown
system
data.
For using
thedoes
VP
thewithout
SDVP
memory
card
should
have
system
data.
Your piano comes with over 1000 VP tunes.
You
canplayer,
playback
player
music
for
your
listening
For
using
theSie
VPSD
player,
the
SDbundle
memory
card
should
have
system
data.
Schieben
die
SD-Karte
richtig
orientiert
in
den Kartenslot
Use
the
bundle
card
The
SD
memory
card
has
system
data.
pleasure, or you can use them for practice.
Use the bundle SD card The bundle SD memory card has system data.
(siehe
When using a new
SD card orSie
when VP playerkeinesfalls
does not work, you need toan.
install the
Abbildung).
Wenden
Sie
When
using
new
card orcard.
whendabei
VP player does not work, Gewalt
you need to installEntfernen
the
system
data
intoathe
SDSD
memory
system
data
into
the
SDinto
memory
card.
die
Karte
nicht
und
schalten
Sie
das
Piano
nicht
ab,
so
lange
die
Karte
Install
system
data
an
SD
memory
card
Insert the bundle SD memory
card data
intointo
the
SD card card
slot on the piano.
system
an
SDonmemory
1)Install
Format
the SD memory
card
your PC. (FAT32)
wird,
also
Daten
darauf
werden. Dies würde
The beschrieben
VP1)player
does
not
without
theonSDyour
memory
card
that hasgespeichert
system data.
Format
the
SDwork
memory
card
PC.at(FAT32)
2) Download
the
SYSTEM
INSTALL
program
our website ww.dynatone.biz
For using
the VP player,
the SDINSTALL
memoryprogram
card should
have
system
data.
2)
the SYSTEM
atSD
our
website
ww.dynatone.biz
3) Download
Install
the downloaded
program
into your
memory
card
on your PC. sogar den Slot
zum
Datenverlust
führen
und
könnte
eventuell
Use the
bundle
SDdownloaded
card The bundle
SD
memory
card
has system
data.
3)Supported
Install the
into
your SD
memory
card on
your
PC.Speed SD memory
SD memoryprogram
cards: This
piano
does
not support
the
High
When
using
a new SD card or when VP player does not work, you need to install the
beschädigen.
Supported
card
'SD HC' SD memory cards: This piano does not support the High Speed SD memory
systemcard
data'SD
intoHC'
the SD memory card.
We recommend
to use only an SD memory card with this piano. Proper operation is not
Install We
system
data into
SD
memory
card
recommend
toan
use
only
an SD
memory
guaranteed
when any
other
types
of card
use. card with this piano. Proper operation is not
1) Format
the
SD
memory
ontypes
your of
PC. (FAT32)
guaranteed
when
anycard
other
Be sure to orient the SD memory
card correctly
when
inserting
it. card use.
2) Downloadcorrectly
the SYSTEM
INSTALL program
at our website ww.dynatone.biz
Be
suretry
toto
orient
when
it. you
Never
forcethe
an SD
SD memory
memory card
card into the SD
cardinserting
slot when
feel resistance.
3) Installcard
the downloaded
program
into your
SD memory
card on your PC.
Never
try
to
force
an
SD
memory
into
the
SD
card
slot
when
you
resistance.
Never remove the SD memory card from the card slot or turn off thefeel
piano
while card data is being accessed by a save,
Supported
SD memory
cards:
does notwhile
support
thedata
High
SD memory
2.Never
Auswahl
Stilrichtung
remove
theeiner
SD
memory
card
from
thedata
cardon
slotthe
orThis
turnpiano
off the
card
is Speed
being
read
or
load
operation.
Doing
so
can
corrupt
the
memory
cardpiano
or even damage
the card
slot. accessed by a save,
cardso'SD
read or load operation. Doing
canHC'
corrupt the data on the memory card or even damage the card slot.
Drücken Sie die Taste
VP-PLAYER.
Pop-Up-Fenster
erscheinen
die
verschiedenen
We recommend
to use only anIm
SD memory
card with this piano.
Proper operation
is not
Select
a
VP
player
music
group.
guaranteed
when
any
other
types
of
card
use.
Stilrichtungen
undcard
die
Lampe
des
Players
leuchtet. Wählen Sie die gewünschte
Select
a VP
player
music
group.
Be Press
sure to the
orientVP
thePLAYER
SD memorybutton.
correctly
when
inserting
it.
(The
pop-up
display
shows music groups and the lamp of the VP
Stilrichtung
mit
Hilfe
der
Tasten
DATA
+
oder
-.by
Drücken
Sie
um
dieVP
Auswahl zu
Press
the
VP
PLAYER
button.
(The
pop-up
display
shows
music
groups
and
the lamp
ofbuttons
the
Never
try
to
force
an
SD
memory
card
into
the
SD
card
slot
when
you
feel
resistance.
player button will be on.) Choose the desired music group
using
DATA
UPENTER
and
DOWN
Never
remove
the SD
memory
cardChoose
from the the
card desired
slot or turn
off thegroup
piano while
card data
is being
accessed
by a save,
player
button
will
be
on.)
music
by
using
DATA
UP
and
DOWN
buttons
bestätigen.
ImsoDisplay
eineshows
Liste
von
Songs
gewählten Stilrichtung.
and
ENTERDoing
button.
Then
theerscheint
pop-up
the
VPdamage
music
listder
in the
read or
loadthe
operation.
can
corrupt
the
data on display
the memory
card or
even
the
card
slot.selected music group.
and the ENTER button. Then the pop-up display shows the VP music list in the selected music group.
Select a VP player music group.
Press the VP PLAYER button. (The pop-up display shows music groups and the lamp of the VP
player button will be on.) Choose the desired music group by using DATA UP and DOWN buttons
and the ENTER button. Then the pop-up display shows the VP music list in the selected music group.
There There
are 23areVP
such
Jazz,H
23groups
VP groups
suchasasClassical,
Classical, Jazz,
tunes. tunes.
• Es gibt 23 Stilrichtungen wie z.B. Klassik, Jazz, Gospels, usw. In jeder finden sich 20 bis
VPthe
PLAYER
MUSIC
LIBRARY
page50.
50
50See
Songs. the
See
VP PLAYER
MUSIC
LIBRARYon
on page
Im
Anhang
finden
Sie
eine
Liste
mit
allen
VP-Songs.
•
' 'Zeichen
means
Group
and
' 'für'means
' 'steht
means
Group
and
' meansVP
VPtune.
tune.
für Stilrichtung,
dieses
VP-Song.
• Dieses
• Der Knopf DISPLAY HOLD arbeitet nicht im Modus VP-Player.
The display
button
doesn'twork
work in
in the
The display
holdhold
button
doesn't
theVP
VPpla
p
There are 23 VP groups such as Classical, Jazz, Holiday's, Gospel and etc. in your piano and each group has 20 ~ 50 VP
There are 23 VP groups such as Classical, Jazz, Holiday's, Gospel and etc. in your piano and each group has 20 ~ 50 VP
tunes.
tunes.
See the VP PLAYER MUSIC LIBRARY on page 50.
See
the VPGroup
PLAYER
LIBRARY
on page 50.
' ' means
andMUSIC
' ' means
VP tune.
'The
' means
Group
and ' ' doesn't
means VP
tune.
display
hold button
work
in the VP player mode.
The display hold button doesn't work in the VP player mode.
There are 23 VP groups such as Classical, Jazz, Holiday's, Gospel and etc. in your piano and each group has 20 ~ 50 VP
tunes.
See the VP PLAYER MUSIC LIBRARY on page 50.
' ' means Group and ' ' means VP tune.
The display hold button doesn't work in the VP player mode.
13
13
3. Auswahl eines Songs
13
Wählen Sie mit Hilfe der Knöpfe DATA + oder - einen Song aus der Liste.
Choose the desired music in the selected VP music group.
Choose the desired music by pressing the DATA UP and DOWN buttons in the VP music pop-up
VP Player
screen.
Choose the desired music in the selected VP music group.
There There
are 23areVP
such
Jazz,H
23groups
VP groups
suchasasClassical,
Classical, Jazz,
There ar
tunes. tunes.
tunes.
See theSee
VPthe
PLAYER
MUSIC
LIBRARY
page50.
50
VP PLAYER
MUSIC
LIBRARYon
on page
See the V
' 'Zeichen
means
Group
and
' 'für'means
' 'steht
means
Group
and
' meansVP
VPtune.
tune.
für Stilrichtung,
dieses
VP-Song.
• Dieses
• Um zur Auswahl für die Stilrichtung zurückzukehren, drücken Sie entweder EXIT oder' ' mean
The display
button
doesn'twork
work in
in the
The
display
holdhold
button
doesn't
theVP
VPpla
p
und
ENTER.
Start playback of the selected music.
Choose the desired music by pressing the DATA UP and DOWN buttons in the VP music pop-up
screen.
' ' means Group and ' ' means VP tune.
To go to the VP music group pop-up display, press the EXIT button or select ' ..' and press the ENTER button.
The disp
' ' means Group and ' ' means VP tune.
Press
the
button.
Playback
of the
music
will' start.
To go
to PLAY/STOP
the VP music group
pop-up
display, press
theselected
EXIT button
or select
..' and press the ENTER button.
4. Abspielen des Songs
Start
playback
the selectedDer
music.
Drücken
SieofPLAY/STOP.
ausgewählte Song wird abgespielt.
Press the PLAY/STOP button. Playback of the selected music will start.
Adjusting volume of the music. (Same as Adjusting the accomp volume.)
Press and hold the SETUP/KEYPAD button and adjust volume by using the ACCOMP VOLUME UP and DOWN
keys .
1) See ACCOMPANIMENT VOLUME section on page 12.
2)Adjusting
The default
volumeofisthe
65 (Adjusting
range:
0 ~ 100). the accomp volume.)
volume
music. (Same
as Adjusting
Einstellen
der Lautstärke
funktioniert
wiethebereits
„ Lautstärke
Adjusting
of the music.
Press
andDas
holdTempo
the
SETUP/KEYPAD
button and adjust
volume by using
ACCOMPunter
VOLUME
UP and DOWNfür die
keys
. tune
Each VP
has
its
default
tempo.
When
starting
playback
of
a
music,
tempo
of
the
demo
music
is
set
to
default
tempo.
Begleitautomatik“ beschrieben. Mit der Werkseinstellung wird die
Lautstärke
auf
Tempo
be changed duringVOLUME
playback ofsection
the music
by using
the TEMPO UP or DOWN button.
1) Seecan
ACCOMPANIMENT
on
page
12.
(0-100) zurückgesetzt.
2)When
The default
volume
is 65music,
(Adjusting
range:
~ the
100).default tempo.
1)
repeating
a demo
tempo
goes0to
2)Adjusting
If you pressTempo
both the
TEMPO
UP
and
DOWN
buttons,
tempo is set to default tempo.
of the music.
65
Jeder Song wird im Playback mit seinem ab Werk eingestelltem Tempo gespielt. Wenn Sie
Each
VP tune
has its default
tempo. When starting playback of a music, tempo of the demo music is set to default tempo.
Repeat
playback
of a tune.
dieses
ändern
möchten,
können
Sie
des
Playbacks
mit music
Hilfe der Tasten
Tempo
can
be changed
during playback
of
using
thedas
TEMPO
or DOWN
button.
Press the
TR1/R
button
during
playback
of the
the music
music.by
After
finishing
of während
theUP
selected
music,
playback
of the same
will
start automatically
again.
1) When
repeating a+
demo
music,
tempo
goesder
to the
defaultwiederholt,
tempo.
TEMPO
oder
- tun.
Wird
Song
startet er wieder mit seinem
2)Playback
If youOriginaltempo.
press
the TEMPO
UP andSie
DOWN
tempo
is set to default
ofboth
ALL tunes.
Wenn
diebuttons,
Knöpfe
TEMPO
+ undtempo.
TEMPO - gleichzeitig drücken, wird
Press
the
TR1/A
button
during
playback
of
the
music.
After
finishing
of
the
selected
music, playback of the next music
Repeat
playback
of aebenfalls
tune.
das
Tempo
auf
das
Originaltempo
zurückgesetzt.
will start automatically.
Press the TR1/R button during playback of the music. After finishing of the selected music, playback of the same music
will start automatically again.
Wenn Sie den gleichen Song noch einmal abspielen möchten, drücken Sie während des
einmal
Playback of ALL tunes.
die Taste
Sobald
der ofSong
dannmusic,
zu Ende
wird
er noch
Press the Playbacks
TR1/A button during
playbackTR1/R.
of the music.
After finishing
the selected
playbackist,
of the
next music
will start automatically.
abgespielt.
14
Wenn Sie alle Songs der Reihe nach anhören möchten, drücken Sie während des
Abspielens die Taste TR1/A. Die Songs werden dann automatisch abgespielt.
14
5. Stoppen des Playbacks
Um das Playback anzuhalten, drücken Sie den Knopf PLAY/STOP. Wenn Sie die Taste
STOP drücken, werden alle Funktionen wie z.B. das Wiederholen, abgeschaltet.
6. Ändern der Stilrichtung
Drücken Sie EXIT im Pop-Up-Fenster der VP-Songs. Die Stilrichtungen erscheinen
daraufhin im Fenster. Sie können mit den Tasten DATA + und DATA - zwischen den
Stilrichtungen wechseln. Bestätigen Sie Ihre Auswahl mit ENTER.
Change the VP music group.
Press the EXIT button in the VP music tune pop-up.
Change
the VP
music
group.
Then
the VP music
group
will be
displayed on the screen.
Press
the
EXIT
button
in
the
VP
musicthe
tune
pop-up.
Choose the VP music group by using
DATA
UP and DOWN buttons and press the ENTER button.
Then the VP music group will be displayed on the screen.
Choose the VP music group by using the DATA UP and DOWN buttons and press the ENTER button.
There are 23 VP groups such
tunes.
See the VP PLAYER MUSIC LIB
means
Group
' ' mean
Sie können statt über EXIT auch über die Auswahl' 'durch
die Taste
DATA - undand
ENTER
zur Auswahl der Stilrichtungen gelangen.
The display hold button doesn
Instead of the EXIT button, it's possible to go to the the pop-up displays VP music group.
Select ' ..' by using DATA DOWN button and press the ENTER button in the VP music tune pop-up, the screen displays VP
music
group
Instead
ofpop-up.
the EXIT button, it's possible to go to the the pop-up displays VP music group.
Select ' ..' by using DATA DOWN button and press the ENTER button in the VP music tune pop-up, the screen displays VP
music group pop-up.
7.the
Verlassen
des Modus VP-Player
EXIT
VP player.
Drücken
Siebutton.
den Knopf
VP display
PLAYER.
erscheint das Hauptmenü und das Piano
Press the
VP PLAYER
The pop-up
showsIm
theDisplay
main menu.
the
VPden
player.
geht
in
zurück mit den Einstellungen, die vor dem Benutzen des VPTheEXIT
piano
returns
playSpielmodus
mode.
Press the
VP PLAYER
The pop-up display shows the main menu.
Players
aktivbutton.
waren.
The
piano
returns
playmode,
mode.
When
returning
to play
piano will be set same as before starting the VP player mode.
When returning to play mode, piano will be set same as before starting the VP player mode.
Auswahl der Sounds (Voices)
Selecting Voices
Das Piano stellt eine reiche Auswahl authentischer Sounds bereit, inklusive Piano-,
Streicher- und Bläser-Sounds. Ebenso verfügt es über eine Percussion-Funktion, so dass
Sie Schlagzeug, Percussion und15verschiedene Effekte direkt über die Tastatur spielen
können.
The piano features a wealth of rich, authentic voices, including piano, strings and brass instruments. It also
15
features a keyboard percussion function that lets you play realistic drum, percussion sounds, and various
effect sounds
directly from keyboard.
Voice-Arten
80 Sounds mit GM 128 Sounds
Voice Types
80 Sounds with GM 128 Voice Sounds
7 Drumkits
7 Drum kits
1 Sound
set
1 Effect
Soundeffekt
Set
DieofVoices
sind
12 Auswahltasten
zugewiesen.
The voices
the piano
are assigned
to 12 voice select
buttons. Each button is assigned to an upper
Selecting Voices
voice and lower voice.
1. Auswahl eines Sounds
Select a Voice.
Sie können eine Voice auswählen, indem Sie den entsprechenden Knopf drücken.
Select the desired voice by pressing the appropriate VOICE button.
Piano has total 11 voice groups and each voice group has 8 voices.
When pressing a VOICE button, the pop-up display shows the selected voice for 3 seconds in the voice group.
While the voice pop-up display shows, you can select one of eight voices of the selected voice group by pressing the
VOICE button. Also, the voice can be selected by pressing DATA UP and DOWN buttons.
voice and lower voice.
Select a Voice.
Select the desired voice by pressing the appropriate VOICE button.
Das Piano hat 11 Voice-Gruppen, in jeder Gruppe befinden sich 8 Voices.
Drücken Sie einen Voice-Knopf. Im Display erscheint ein Pop-Up-Fenster, das 3 Sekunden
lang den eingestellten Sound anzeigt.
In dieser Zeit können Sie eine der 8 gezeigten Voices auswählen, indem Sie die VOICETaste
oder
dieandTasten
+ 8und
Piano drücken
has total 11 voice
groups
each voiceDATA
group has
voices.DATA - benutzen.
When pressing a VOICE button, the pop-up display shows the selected voice for 3 seconds in the voice group.
Das
Pop-Up-Fenster
3 Sekunden
zumofHauptmenü
zurück.
Wenn
While
the voice pop-up displaykehrt
shows, nach
you can select
one of eight voices
the selected voice group
by pressing
the Sie jedoch
VOICE
button. Also,„Display
the voice canHold“
be selected
by pressing DATA
UP and
DOWN
buttons.
die
Funktion
aktivieren,
bleibt
das
Pop-Up-Fenster
dauerhaft stehen und
POP-UP
Display
kehrt
nicht
zum Hauptmenü zurück.
The pop-up display returns to the main menu after 3 seconds.
DISPLAY HOLD
Die
letzte ausgewählte Voice bleibt im Speicher des Pianos erhalten.
If the DISPLAY HOLD is on, the pop-up display does not return to main menu and the LCD screen shows the current popup display continuously.
Backing Up the Selected Voice.
The last selected voice in each button will be retained in memory.
Übersicht
über die Voices
VOICE LIST
Piano
VIB.
Harpsi.
Organ
E.Organ
Violin
Strings
Brass
Sax.
Bass
Perc.
Piano 1
Piano 2
Piano 3
E.Piano 1
E.Piano 2
HonkyTonk
Clavinet
TinkleBell
Vibraphone
Marlimba
Xylophone
Celesta
Glocken
Music Box
Tubel
Santure
Harpsichord
Fantasia
HaloPad
PolySynth
SpaceVox
SynthVoice
OrchestraHit
SweepPad
PipeOrgan
Square
Sawtooth
Calliope
Charang
SoloVox
Fifths
BassLead
Organ 1
Organ 2
Organ 3
ReedOrgan
Accordion
Harmonica
Bandonion
PanFlute
Violin
Cello
Harp
Guitar
SteelGuitar
JazzGuitar
DriveGuitar
ElecGuitar
Strings
SlowStr.
TremoloStr.
PizzicatoStr.
SynthStr.1
SynthStr.2
Choir
Voice
Brass
SynthBrs.
SynthBrs.
Trumpet
Trumbone
MutedTrpt.
SynthVoice
Brightness
TenorSax
AltoSax
Oboe
EnglishHorn
Bassoon
Piccolo
Flute
Clarinet
Bass 1
Bass 2
Bass 3
Bass 4
SlapBass1
SlapBass2
SynthBass1
SynthBass2
Standard
Room
Power
Elec
TR808
Brush
Orchestra
SFX
Play the selected voice.
Adjust
the volume
by using
MASTER VOLUME
and play the piano with the selected voice.
2.
Spielen
mit dem
gewählten
Sound
Stellen Sie die Lautstärke mit Hilfe des Reglers MASTER VOLUME ein und spielen Sie
auf dem Piano mit Ihrer ausgesuchten Voice.
16
GM Voice
GM Voice
GM Voice
here are 128 different
voicesPiano
in the piano.
When
GMverschiedene
VOICE button is Voices.
selected, one
In diesem
finden
Siethe
128
Wenn Sie den Knopf GM VOICE
f 128 GM voices
can
be
assigned.
drücken, können Sie eine der 128 Voices auswählen.
CHANGING THE GM VOICE BY DATA BUTTONS.
1. Drücken Sie den Knopf GM VOICE.
Press the Ein
GM Pop-Up-Display
VOICE button. zeigt Ihnen Nummer und Name der gegenwärtig ausgewählten Voice.
he Pop-up display
shows you
theGoblin.
current selected voice number and voice name.
Ab Werk:
102
Default GM voice: 102 Goblin
Select the2.desired
voice
the DATA
and DOWN
buttons.
Wählen
Sie by
mitpressing
den Tasten
DATAUP
+ und
- die gewünschte
Voice aus.
See the GM VOICEEine
page 46 in thisüber
manual.
Übersicht
die GM Voices finden Sie im Anhang.
• TABLE on
POP-UP Display The pop-up display returns to the main menu after 3 seconds.
If the DISPLAY HOLD is on, the pop-up display does not return to main menu and the LCD screen shows the current pop-up display.
Backing Up the Selected Voice The last selected voice in each button will be retained in memory.
Main Voice Volume
ThePress
Pop-up
display
you
the current selected voice number and voice name.
the
GM shows
VOICE
button.
The Pop-up display shows you the current selected voice
voice number
number and
and voice
voice name.
name.
GMdisplay
voice: 102
Goblinyou the current selected voice number and voice name.
TheDefault
Pop-up
shows
Default GM voice: 102 Goblin
Default GM voice: 102 Goblin
• Das Pop-Up-Fenster kehrt nach 3 Sekunden zum Hauptmenü zurück. Wenn Sie jedoch
die Funktion „Display Hold“ aktivieren, bleibt das Pop-Up-Fenster dauerhaft stehen und
kehrt nicht zum Hauptmenü zurück.
• Die letzte ausgewählte Voice in jedem Knopf bleibt im Speicher des Pianos erhalten.
Select
the
desired
voice
by
pressing
the
DATA
UP
and
DOWN
buttons.
Select
the desired
desired voice
voice by
by pressing
pressing the
the DATA
DATA UP
UP and
and DOWN
DOWN buttons.
buttons.
Select
the
See
the
GM
VOICE
TABLE
on
page
46
in
this
manual.
Select
the
desired
pressing
the DATA UP and DOWN buttons.
See the GM
VOICE
TABLE onvoice
page 46by
in this
manual.
See theDisplay
GM VOICE
ondisplay
page 46
in thistomanual.
POP-UP
TheTABLE
pop-up
returns
the main menu after 3 seconds.
See
the GMDisplay
VOICE TABLE
on page
46 inreturns
this manual.
POP-UP
The pop-up
display
to the main menu after 3 seconds.
POP-UP
Display
pop-up
display
returns
to not
the return
main menu
after
3 seconds.
If the
DISPLAY
HOLDThe
is on,
the pop-up
display
does
to main
menu
and the LCD screen shows the current pop-up display.
POP-UP
DisplayHOLD
The pop-up
display
returns
the not
main
menu
seconds.
If the DISPLAY
is on, the
pop-up
displaytodoes
return
toafter
main3menu
and the LCD screen shows the current pop-up display.
If the DISPLAY
is on,Voice
the pop-up
display
does voice
not return
to main
menu
the LCD screen
shows the current pop-up display.
Backing
Up theHOLD
Selected
The last
selected
in each
button
willand
be retained
in memory.
Backing
Up HOLD
the Selected
last selected
willthe
be LCD
retained
in shows
memory.
If the
DISPLAY
is on, theVoice
pop-upThe
display
does not voice
returnin
toeach
mainbutton
menu and
screen
the current pop-up display.
Backing Up the Selected Voice The last selected voice in each button will be retained in memory.
Backing Up the Selected Voice The last selected voice in each button will be retained in memory.
Lautstärke der Main-Voice
Main
Voice
Volume
Main
Voice
Volume
Main
Voice
Volume
Main
Voice
Volume
1. Halten Sie den
Knopf SETUP/KEYPAD
gedrückt
und drücken Sie LAYER
ADJUSTING
THE MAIN VOICE
VOLUME
So regeln Sie die Lautstärke für den Hauptsound (die Main-Voice) des Pianos.
ADJUSTING THE MAIN VOICE VOLUME
ADJUSTING
THEMAIN
VOICE
VOLUME
(oder SPLIT)
VOLUME +the
oder
-.MAIN
Das Pop-Up-Fenster
für die Lautstärke
This
main
ADJUSTING
VOICE
VOLUME
Thisdetermines
determines THE
thevolume
volumeofofthe
the
mainvoice.
voice.
This
determines the volume of the main voice.
erscheint imThis
Display.
determines the volume of the main voice.
Call
pop-up
Callup
upthe
thevolume
volume
pop-updisplay.
display.Der Cursor wird von Lr
2. Drücken Sie ENTER-Taste
im Pop-Up-Fenster.
Call
up
the
volume
pop-updisplay.
display.
Press
and
hold
down
the
SETUP/KEYPAD
button
and
Press
and
hold
down
the
SETUP/KEYPAD
button
andpress
pressLAYER(or
LAYER(orSPLIT)
SPLIT)
Call
up
the
volume
pop-up
(Layer) nach
Ma and
(Main)
bewegt.
Das
bedeutet,
Siedisplay
können
die
Press
hold
down
the
SETUP/KEYPAD
button
and
press
LAYER(or
SPLIT)
VOLUME
UP
or
DOWN
key.
The
volume
pop-up
appears.
VOLUME
UP down
or DOWN
key. The volumebutton
pop-upand
display
appears.
Press
and
hold
the
SETUP/KEYPAD
press
LAYER(or
SPLIT)
Lautstärke der
Main-Voice
mit Hilfe
dervolume
Tasten
LAYER
VOLUME
VOLUME
UP
DOWN
key.The
The
pop-up
display
appears. + oder VOLUME
UP
oror
DOWN
key.
pop-up
display
appears.
Move
the
cursor
voice
pop-up
Move
the
cursorto
tomain
mainvolume
voicein
inthe
thevolume
volume
pop-updisplay.
display.
einstellen.
Move
the
cursor
to
main
voice
in
the
volume
pop-up
display.
Press
the
ENTER
button
in
the
volume
pop-up
display.
The
cursor
isdisplay.
moved
Press
the
ENTER
button
in
the
volume
pop-up
display.
The
cursor
is
moved
Move
the
cursor
to
main
voice
in
the
volume
pop-up
3. Regeln Sie from
die
Lautstärke
mit den
Tasten
LAYER
(oder The
SPLIT)
VOLUME
Press
the
ENTER
button
in
the
volume
pop-up
display.
cursor
is
moved
Lr(LAYER)
to
Ma(MAIN).
from
Lr(LAYER)
to
Ma(MAIN).
the ENTER button in the volume pop-up display. The cursor is moved
+ oder -. Press
from
Lr(LAYER)
toMa(MAIN).
Ma(MAIN).
This
means
that
the
main
This
means
thatto
the
mainvoice
voicevolume
volumecan
canbebechanged
changedbybyusing
usingthe
thelayer
layer
from
Lr(LAYER)
This
means
that
themain
main
voicevolume
volumecan
canbebechanged
changedbybyusing
usingthe
thelayer
layer
volume
up
and
down
keys.
volume
upthat
and
down
keys.
This
means
the
voice
volume
up
and
down
keys.
Tasten
gleichzeitig
drücken,
wird die Lautstärke auf die
volume
up and
down
keys.
• Wenn Sie die
Adjust
the
main
voice
volume.
Adjust
the
main
voice
volume.
Adjust
the
main
voice
volume.
Grundeinstellung
100
(0-100)
zurückgesetzt.
Adjust
the
voice
volume
bybyusing
SPLIT)
VOLUME
UP
andDOWN
keys
Adjust
themain
main
voice
volume
usingthe
theLAYER(or
LAYER(or
SPLIT)
VOLUME
UP
andDOWN
keys
Adjust
the
main
voice
volume.
Adjust
the
main
voice
volume
by
using
the
LAYER(or
SPLIT)
VOLUME
UP
andDOWN
keys
If Ifyou
press
both
VOLUME
UP
and
DOWN
Keys
atatthe
same
automatically
return
toto
the
you
press
both
VOLUME
UP
and
DOWN
Keys
the
sametime
time
automatically
return
the
der
Tasten
gedrückt,
um
die
Einstellung
kontinuierlich
• Halten Sie eine
Adjust
the
main
voice
volume
by
using
the
LAYER(or
SPLIT)
VOLUME
UP
andDOWN
keys
default
range
ofof
volume
is is0 ~
100.
defaultmain
mainvolume(100).
volume(100).The
The
range
volume
0~
100.
If you press both VOLUME UP and DOWN Keys at the same time automatically return to the
IfHold
youthe
press
bothfor
VOLUME
UP decrementing
and
DOWN Keys
at
the same time automatically return to the
vorzunehmen.
incrementing.
Hold
thebutton
button
forcontinuous
continuous
decrementing
default
main
volume(100).
The range
of volumeorisor
0incrementing.
~ 100.
default
main
volume(100).
The
range
of
volume
is
0
~
100.
If Hold
HOLD
is ison,
pop-up
not
return
toto
main
menu
and
thethe
LCD
screen
Ifthe
theDISPLAY
DISPLAY
HOLD
on,the
the
pop-updisplay
displaydoes
does
not
return
main
menu
and
LCD
screen
kehrt
3decrementing
Sekunden
zum
Hauptmenü
zurück.
the
button
fornach
continuous
decrementing
or
incrementing.
• Das Pop-Up-Fenster
Holdthe
the
button
for
continuous
or incrementing.
shows
the
current
pop-up
display.
shows
current
pop-up
If the
DISPLAY
HOLDdisplay.
is on, the pop-up display does not return to main menu and the LCD screen
If
the
DISPLAY
HOLD
is
on,
the
pop-up
display
does
not
return
to
main
menu
and
the
LCD
screen
Wenn Sie jedoch
die Funktion „Display Hold“ aktivieren, bleibt das Popshows the current pop-up display.
the
currentto
pop-up
display.
Release
theSETUP/KEYPAD
SETUP/KEYPADbutton.
button.
Return
tothe
the
play
mode.
the
Return
play
Up-Fenster shows
dauerhaft
stehen
undmode.
kehrt Release
nicht
zum
Hauptmenü
zurück.
Release
the
SETUP/KEYPAD
button.
Return
to
the
play
mode.
Return to the play mode. Release the SETUP/KEYPAD button.
4. Drücken Sie SETUP/KEYPAD um zum Spielmodus
zurückzukehren.
1717
17
17
Layer
Dieser Modus erlaubt das Spiel mit zwei verschiedenen Sounds gleichzeitig. Dies macht
es einfach, besonders reiche und dicke tonale Texturen zu erzeugen. Das Verhältnis der
beiden Sounds in Bezug auf Lautstärke zueinander kann eingestellt werden.
Spielen mit einer Layer-Voice
1. Wählen Sie die Main-Voice wie zuvor unter „Auswahl der Sounds (Voices)“ beschrieben.
2. Rufen Sie den Layer-Modus auf, indem Sie den Knopf LAYER drücken. Die
Kontrolllampe leuchtet auf und das entsprechende Pop-Up-Fenster erscheint.
PLAYING
WITH
THE
LAYER
VOICE
PLAYING
WITH
THE
LAYER
VOICE
PLAYING
WITH
THE
LAYER
VOICE
PLAYING
WITH
THE
LAYER
VOICE
Select
the
main
voice.
Select
the
main
voice.
Select
the
main
voice.
Select
the
main
voice.
Select
a voice
normal
way.
(see
the
SELECTING
VOICES
section
onon
page
16)
Select
a voice
inin
the
normal
way.
(see
the
SELECTING
VOICES
section
on
page
16)
Select
voice
inthe
the
normal
way.
(see
the
SELECTING
VOICES
section
page
16)
Select
aavoice
in
the
normal
way.
(see
the
SELECTING
VOICES
section
on
page
16)
Call
up
the
layer
mode.
Call
up
the
layer
mode.
Call
up
the
layer
mode.
Callupup
the
layer
mode.
layer
mode,
press
the
LAYER
button.
Lamp
lights
and
the
layer
on.
ToTo
call
upup
the
layer
mode,
press
the
LAYER
button.
Lamp
lights
and
the
layer
isisset
on.
Tocall
call
upthe
the
layer
mode,
press
the
LAYER
button.
Lamp
lights
and
the
layer
isset
set
on.
To
call
the
layer
mode,
press
the
LAYER
button.
Lamp
lights
and
the
layer
is
set
on.
Grundeinstellungen
The
layer
pop-up
display
appears.
The
layer
pop-up
display
appears.
The
layer
pop-up
display
appears.
The layer pop-up display appears.
•Voice: Slow Strings
•Lautstärke: 050
•Pedal: ein
The0default values:
•Oktave:
The
default
values:
The
default
values:
3. Wählen Sie nun die Layer-Voice wie zuvor unter „Auswahl der
Select
the
layered
voice.
Select
the
layered
voice.
Select
the
layered
voice.
beschrieben.
Select
the
layered
voice.
defaultSLOW
values:
STRINGS
1)The
Voice
STRINGS
SLOW
STRINGS
1) Voice
1) Voice
Voice SLOW
SLOW
STRINGS
2)1)
Volume 050
050
050
2) Volume
2)
Volume
050
Volume ON
3)2)
Pedal
3) Pedal
3) Pedal
Pedal ONON
4)3)
Octave 0 ON
0
4)
Octave
4)
Octave
Sounds4)(Voices)“
Octave 00
Select
a voice
normal
way.
(see
the
SELECTING
VOICES
section
onon
page
16)
Select
a voice
inin
the
normal
way.
(see
the
SELECTING
VOICES
section
on
page
16)
Select
voice
inthe
the
normal
way.
(see
the
SELECTING
VOICES
section
page
16)
Select
aavoice
in
the
normal
way.
(see
the
SELECTING
VOICES
section
on
page
16)
ADJUSTING
THE
LAYER
VOLUME
ADJUSTING
THE
LAYER
VOLUME
ADJUSTING
THE
LAYER
VOLUME
ADJUSTING
LAYER
VOLUME
This
determines theTHE
volume
of the layered
voice. There two ways to adjust layer volume.
This
determines
thethe
volume
of of
the
layered
voice.
There
two
ways
to to
adjust
layer
volume.
This
determines
the
volume
ofthe
the
layered
voice.
There
two
ways
to adjust
adjust
layer
volume.
This
determines
layered
voice.
There
two
ways
layer
volume.
Einstellen der
Lautstärke
imvolume
Pop-Up-Fenster
the
LAYER
VOLUME
layer
pop-up
display.
A.A.
Adjusting
the
LAYER
VOLUME
inin
the
layer
pop-up
display.
A.Adjusting
Adjusting
the
LAYER
VOLUME
inthe
the
layer
pop-up
display.
A.
Adjusting
the
LAYER
VOLUME
in
the
layer
pop-up
display.
1. Rufen Sie den
Layer-Modus
auf,
indem
Sie
den
Knopf
LAYER
drücken.
Call
up
the
layer
mode.
Call
up
the
layer
mode.
Call
up
the
layer
mode.
Call
the
mode.
Die Kontrolllampe
leuchtet
auf
und the
dasLAYER
entsprechende
Pop-Up-Fenster
To call
upup
the
layerlayer
mode,
press
button. Lamp lights
and the layer is set
ToTo
call
upup
the
layer
mode,
press
thethe
LAYER
button.
Lamp
lights
and
thethe
layer
is set
Tocall
call
upthe
the
layer
mode,
press
the
LAYER
button.
Lamp
lights
and
the
layer
set
layer mode,
LAYER
button.
Lamp
lights
and
layer
isis set
The layer pop-up
displaypress
appears.
erscheint.on.on.on.
The
layer
pop-up
display
appears.
The
layer
pop-up
display
appears.
on. The layer pop-up display appears.
2. Drücken Sie ENTER,
die
Grundeinstellung
der
Lautstärke
(50) display.
wird
Move
the
cursor
value
layer
pop-up
Move
the
cursor
toto
volume
value
ininin
the
layer
pop-up
display.
Move
the
cursor
tovolume
volume
value
inthe
the
layer
pop-up
display.
angezeigt.Press
Move
the
cursor
to
volume
value
the
layer
pop-up
display.
the ENTER button during the LCD screen shows the layer pop-up
display.
Press
the
ENTER
button
during
the
LCD
screen
shows
thethe
layer
pop-up
display.
Press
the
ENTER
button
during
the
LCD
screen
shows
the
layer
pop-up
display.
3. Stellen Sie
die
Lautstärke
nach
Ihren
Wünschen
(0-100)
ein,
indem
Sie die
Press
the
ENTER
during
the
LCD
screen
layer
pop-up
display.
The
cursor
goes
tobutton
the
volume
value
(default
50).shows
The
cursor
goes
to
the
volume
value
(default
50).
The
cursor
goes
to
the
volume
value
(default
50).
The+cursor
to the volume
valueSie
(default
Tasten DATA
odergoes
- benutzen.
Wenn
die 50).
Tasten gleichzeitig drücken,
Adjust the layer volume.
Adjust
the
layer
volume.
Adjust
the
layer
volume.
wird die Grundeinstellung
wiederhergestellt.
Sie eine
der. Tasten
Adjust
the
layer
volume.
Adjust
the layer
volume
by using the DATA Halten
UP and DOWN
buttons
Adjust
the
layer
volume
by
using
thethe
DATA
UPUP
and
DOWN
buttons
.Pop-UpAdjust
the
layer
volume
byusing
using
the
DATA
UP
and
DOWN
buttons
gedrückt, um
die
Einstellung
kontinuierlich
vorzunehmen.
Das
Adjust
the
layer
volume
by
DATA
and
DOWN
buttons
..return to the
If you press both DATA UP and DOWN buttons at the same time automatically
If
you
press
both
DATA
UP
and
DOWN
buttons
at
the
same
time
automatically
return
to the
If
you
press
both
DATA
UP
and
DOWN
buttons
at
the
same
time
automatically
return
to the
the
default
Layer
Volume(50).
The
of
volume
is 0 ~ 100.
If nach
you
press
both
DATA
UPrange
and
DOWN
buttons
at the same
time automatically
return
to
Fenster kehrt
3Volume(50).
Sekunden
zum
Hauptmenü
zurück.
Wenn Sie
jedoch
default
Layer
Volume(50).
The
range
of
volume
is
0
~
100.
default
Layer
The
range
of
volume
is
0
~
100.
Hold Layer
the button
for continuous
decrementing
default
Volume(50).
The range
of volume or
is incrementing.
0 ~ 100.
die Funktion
„Display
Hold“
aktivieren,
bleibt
das
Pop-Up-Fenster
Hold
thethe
button
for
continuous
decrementing
or incrementing.
Hold
thebutton
button
forcontinuous
continuous
decrementing
incrementing.
IfHold
the
DISPLAY
HOLD
is on,
the
pop-up
display
does
not return
to main menu and thedauerhaft
LCD screen
for
decrementing
ororincrementing.
If
the
DISPLAY
HOLD
is
on,
the
pop-up
display
does
notnot
return
to main
menu
andand
thethe
LCDLCD
screen
If
the
DISPLAY
HOLD
is
on,
the
pop-up
display
does
not
return
tomain
main
menu
and
the
LCD
screen
shows
the
current
pop-up
display.
If
the
DISPLAY
HOLD
is
on,
the
pop-up
display
does
return
to
menu
screen
stehen und
kehrt
nicht
zum
Hauptmenü
zurück.
shows
the
current
pop-up
display.
shows
the
current
pop-up
display.
shows the current pop-up display.
4. Wenn die Funktion
Hold“
aktiviert
ist,EXIT
kehren
Sie zum Hauptmenü
Press the
button.
Return„Display
to the main
menu.
Press
the
EXIT
button.
Press
the
EXIT
button.
Return
to
the
main
menu.
Return
to
the
main
menu.
zurück, indem
Sie
drücken.
Anderenfalls
kehrt
das Display
3
Press
the EXIT
button.
Return
to the
main
menu.
Even
if youEXIT
don't
press
the EXIT
button,
the pop-up
display
automatically
returnsnach
to the main
Even
ifafter
you
don't
press
thethe
button,
thethe
pop-up
automatically
returns
totothe
main
Even
don't
press
the
EXIT
button,
the
pop-up
display
automatically
returns
to
the
main
menu
3you
seconds.
But
ifEXIT
the
Display
hold
is
on,
youdisplay
should
press
the EXIT
button
return
to
Even
if ifyou
don't
press
EXIT
button,
pop-up
display
automatically
returns
to
the
main
Sekunden
selbständig
dorthin
zurück.
menu
afterafter
3 seconds.
But ifBut
theif Display
holdhold
is on,
should
press
the the
EXITEXIT
button
to return
to to
menu
3 seconds.
the Display
is you
on, you
should
press
button
to return
the
main
menu.
menu after 3 seconds. But if the Display hold is on, you should press the EXIT button to return to
thethe
main
menu.
themain
main
menu.
menu.
Layer
Layer
18
Layer
Layer
1818
18
Einstellen der Lautstärke mit den Tasten Layer Volume + und B. Adjusting the LAYER VOLUME by using the LAYER VOLUME UP and
and DOWN
DOWNkeys.
keys.
B.
B. Adjusting
Adjusting the
the LAYER
LAYER VOLUME
VOLUME by
by using
using the
the LAYER
LAYER VOLUME
VOLUME UP
UP and
andDOWN
DOWNkeys.
keys.
up the
volume pop-up display.
1. Halten Sie denCall
Knopf
SETUP/KEYPAD
gedrückt und drücken Sie die
Call
up
the
volume
pop-up
display.
Call
up
the
volume
pop-up
display.
Press
and
hold
down
the
SETUP/KEYPAD
VOLUME
button and press LAYER VOLUME
Tasten LAYER VOLUME + oder -.
UP
orand
DOWN
key.
Thethe
Volume
pop-up display
appears.
Press
hold
down
SETUP/KEYPAD
button
and
press
LAYER
VOLUME
Press
and
hold
down
the
SETUP/KEYPAD
button
and
press
LAYER
VOLUME
2. Justieren Sie
die
Lautstärke
mit
Hilfepop-up
der Tasten
LAYER VOLUME + oder
UP
display
UP or
or DOWN
DOWN key.
key. The
The Volume
Volume pop-up
display appears.
appears.
Adjust
the
layer
volume.
- (0-100). Wenn Sie die Tasten gleichzeitig drücken, wird die
Adjust
the
layer
Adjust
the
layer
by using
the LAYER
keys ..
Adjust
the volume
layer volume.
volume.
VOLUME
UPTasten
and DOWN
keys
Grundeinstellung
wiederhergestellt.
Halten
SieVOLUME
eine der
gedrückt,
Adjust
the
layer
volume
byUPusing
the
UP
and
keys
Adjust
layer
using
the LAYER
LAYER
UP automatically
and DOWN
DOWNreturn
keys .to
.to the
If youthe
press
bothvolume
VOLUMEby
and DOWN
automatically
return
the
Keys atVOLUME
the same time
um die Einstellung
kontinuierlich
vorzunehmen.
Das Pop-Up-Fenster
default
layer
Volume(50).
IfIf you
press
both
default
you
press
both VOLUME
VOLUME UP
UP and
and DOWN
DOWN Keys
Keys at
at the
the same
same time
time automatically
automatically return
return to
to the
the
The
of volume
is 0Hauptmenü
~ 100.
default
layer
The range
kehrt nach 3
Sekunden
zum
zurück. Wenn Sie jedoch die
default
layer Volume(50).
Volume(50).
The
of
volume
is
00 ~~ 100.
Hold
the button
for continuous
decrementing or incrementing.
Holdrange
The
range
of
volume
is
100.
Funktion „Display
Hold“
aktivieren,
bleibt dasincrementing.
Pop-Up-Fenster dauerhaft
Hold
the
button
Display
Display
Hold
theHold
button for
for continuous
continuous decrementing
decrementing or
or incrementing.
stehen und IfIfkehrt
nicht
zum
Hauptmenü
zurück.
the
does
not
return to main menu and the LCD
Display
Hold
the
DISPLAY
HOLD
is
on,
the
pop-up
display
LCD screen
screen shows
shows
Display Hold
the
Ifthe
the
DISPLAY
HOLD
is
on,
the
pop-up
display
does
not
return
to
main
menu
and
the
LCD
screen
shows
current
pop-up
display.
If
the
DISPLAY
HOLD
is
on,
the
pop-up
display
does
not
return
to
main
menu
and
the
LCD
screen
shows
3. Kehren Sie the
zum Hauptmenü
zurück, indem Sie den SETUP/KEYPADthe current
current pop-up
pop-up display.
display.
Knopf wieder loslassen.
Return to the main menu.
Return
to the main menu.
Release
the SETUP/KEYPAD
button.
Release
Release the
the SETUP/KEYPAD
SETUP/KEYPAD button.
button.
CHANGING THE PEDAL OPTION
Ändern der Pedalfunktion
CHANGING THE PEDAL OPTION
Hier können
CHANGING
THE the
PEDAL
This determines whether
damperOPTION
pedal and assignable pedal affects the layered
layered voice
voice in
inlayer
layerfunction.
function.
This
This determines
determines whether
whether the
the damper
damper pedal
pedal and
and assignable
assignable pedal
pedal affects
affects the
the layered
layeredvoice
voicein
inlayer
layerfunction.
function.
call up the
layer
mode, im
press
the LAYER
Lamp
Sie wählen,
ob layer
oder welche
Funktion
das
Pedal
Layer-Modus
erfüllen
soll.
Call up the
mode. To
LAYER button.
button.
Lamp lights
lights and
and
the Call
layer up
is set
set
on.layer
The layer
layer
pop-up
the
mode.
To
call
the
the
layer
is
on.
The
pop-up
display
appears.
Todisplay
call up
up appears.
the layer
layer mode,
mode, press
press the
the LAYER
LAYER button.
button. Lamp
Lamp lights
lights and
and
the layer is set on. The layer pop-up display appears.
appears.
Press the
the ENTER
ENTER
Move the cursor to the pedal value in the layer pop-up display.
display. Press
button
in the
thethe
layercursor
pop-upto
display
until
the
to
pedal
option.
Move
theuntil
pedal
valuegoes
in the
Press the
the ENTER
ENTER
layer
pop-up
display. Press
button
in
layer
pop-up
display
the cursor
cursor
goes
to the
thelayer
pedalpop-up
option. display.
button in the layer pop-up display until the cursor
cursor goes
goes to
to the
the pedal
pedal option.
option.
Change the
Select the
the pedal
pedal option.
option. Change
the pedal
pedal option
option by
by using
using the
the DATA
DATA UP
UP and
andDOWN
DOWNbuttons
buttons ..
Select
1. Rufen Sie den Layer-Modus auf, indem Sie den Knopf LAYER drücken. Die
Kontrolllampe leuchtet auf und das entsprechende Pop-Up-Fenster erscheint.
2. Bewegen Sie den Cursor zum Punkt „Pedal Value“ im Pop-Up-Fenster des LayerModus, indem Sie ENTER drücken.
3. Sie können nun die Pedalfunktion mit Hilfe der Tasten DATA + oder - ändern. Wenn Sie
die Tasten gleichzeitig drücken, wird die Grundeinstellung (on) wieder aufgerufen. Sie
können auch hier wieder die Funktion „Display Hold“ nutzen.
4. Wenn die Funktion „Display Hold“ aktiviert ist, kehren Sie zum Hauptmenü zurück,
indem Sie EXIT drücken. Anderenfalls kehrt das Display nach 3 Sekunden selbständig
dorthin zurück.
Ändern der Oktaveinstellung der Layer-Voice
Mit dieser Funktion können Sie die Tonhöhe der Layer-Voice einstellen. Genauere
Hinweise dazu finden Sie im Kapitel „Oktaveinstellung“.
1. Rufen Sie den Layer-Modus auf, indem Sie den Knopf LAYER drücken. Die
Kontrolllampe leuchtet auf und das entsprechende Pop-Up-Fenster erscheint.
2. Bewegen Sie den Cursor zum Punkt „Octave Value“ im Pop-Up-Fenster des LayerModus, indem Sie ENTER drücken.
3. Sie können nun die Oktaveinstellung mit Hilfe der Tasten DATA + oder - ändern
(-1/0/+1). Wenn Sie die Tasten gleichzeitig drücken, wird die Grundeinstellung (0)
wieder aufgerufen. Sie können auch hier wieder die Funktion „Display Hold“ nutzen.
4. Wenn die Funktion „Display Hold“ aktiviert ist, kehren Sie zum Hauptmenü zurück,
indem Sie EXIT drücken. Anderenfalls kehrt das Display nach 3 Sekunden selbständig
dorthin zurück.
Split
Diese Option ermöglicht das Spielen mit zwei verschiedenen Sounds. Sie können
beispielsweise mit der linken Hand Bass spielen und mit der rechten Klavier.
Spielen mit einer Split-Voice
1. Wählen Sie die Main-Voice wie zuvor unter „Auswahl der Sounds (Voices)“ beschrieben.
2. Rufen Sie den Split-Modus auf, indem Sie den Knopf SPLIT drücken. Die Kontrolllampe
leuchtet auf und das entsprechende Pop-Up-Fenster erscheint.
Grundeinstellungen
•Voice: Acoust Bass
•Split Point: F#4
•Lautstärke: 060
•Pedal: aus
•Oktave: 0
Call up the Split mode.
To call up the split mode, press the SPLIT button. Lamp lights and the split is set on.
The split pop-up display appears.
3. Wählen Sie nun die Split-Voice wie zuvor unter „Auswahl der Sounds (Voices)“
beschrieben.
The default values:
1) Voice
2) Split Point
2) Volume
3) Pedal
4) Octave
Ändern des Split Points
ACOUST BASS
F#4
060
OFF
0
Select the split voice.
Sie können den Split Point, der die Trennung zwischen Main-Voice und Split-Voice
Select a voice in the normal way. (see the SELECTING VOICES section on page 16)
darstellt,
jeder beliebigen Taste zuweisen.
CHANGING
THE
SPLIT POINT
1.
Rufen Sie den
Split-Modus
auf, indem Sie den Knopf SPLIT drücken. Die Kontrolllampe
You
can
set
the
point
dividing
the
split
voice
and main
voice ranges at any desired
key position.
leuchtet auf und das entsprechende
Pop-Up-Fenster
erscheint.
2. Bewegen
Siesplit
denmode.
CursorTo
zum
„Split
Point“
Call up the
call Punkt
up the split
mode,
pressim
thePop-Up-Fenster
SPLIT button. Lampdes
lightsSplit-Modus,
and
theindem
split is set
on.
The
split
pop-up
display
appears.
Sie ENTER drücken.
Move
the cursor
to the
splitPoint
pointmit
value
inder
the split
pop-up
3. Sie
können
nun den
Split
Hilfe
Tasten
DATAdisplay.
+ oder - ändern (B2-C#7).
Press the ENTER button in the split pop-up display until the cursor goes to the split point option.
Wenn Sie die Tasten gleichzeitig drücken, wird die Grundeinstellung (F#4) wieder
Change the split
point option.
aufgerufen.
Sie können
auch hier wieder die Funktion „Display Hold“ nutzen.
Change the split point by using the DATA UP and DOWN buttons . (default value: F#4, Range: B2~C#7)
4. IfWenn
die Funktion „Display Hold“ aktiviert ist, kehren Sie zum Hauptmenü zurück,
you press both DATA UP and DOWN buttons at the same time automatically return to the default value (F#4).
Ifindem
the DISPLAY
HOLD
is on, the
pop-up display
does not return to main
menu
and the
LCD screennach
shows the
pop-up display.
Sie
EXIT
drücken.
Anderenfalls
kehrt
das
Display
3 current
Sekunden
selbständig
dorthin
zurück.
Return to
the main menu. Press the EXIT button.
Even if you don't press the EXIT button, the pop-up display automatically returns to the main menu after 3 seconds. But if
the Display hold is on, you should press the EXIT button to return to the main menu.
Sie können den Split Point auch einstellen, indem Sie den Knopf SPLIT gedrückt halten
Instead
of above
the split
point can be assigned
by using
thePoint
SPLIT button
with the keyboard.
und
dann
dieway,
Taste
betätigen,
die den
Split
darstellen
soll.
Press and hold down the SPLIT button and press a desired key. The pressed key is assigned to new split point.
Split point (F4#)
Split
Split
Split
Split
ADJUSTING
THE
SPLIT
VOLUME
ADJUSTINGTHE
THESPLIT
SPLIT20
VOLUME
ADJUSTING
VOLUME
ADJUSTING
THE
SPLIT
VOLUME
This
determines
the
volume
of
the
split voice. There two ways to adjust the split volume.
Einstellen der Lautstärke im Pop-Up-Fenster
Thisdetermines
determinesthe
thevolume
volumeofof
ofthe
thesplit
splitvoice.
voice.
There
two
ways
to
adjust
the
split
volume.
This
There
two
ways
toto
adjust
the
split
volume.
This
determines
the
volume
the
split
voice.
There
two
ways
adjust
the
split
volume.
A.
Adjusting
the
SPLIT
VOLUME
in
the
split
pop-up
display.
A.Adjusting
Adjusting
theSPLIT
SPLIT
VOLUME
inthe
the
splitpop-up
pop-up
display.Die
1. Rufen Sie den
Split-Modus
auf,
indem
Sie in
den
Knopf
SPLIT
drücken.
A.
the
VOLUME
split
display.
A.
Adjusting
the
SPLIT
VOLUME
in
the
split
pop-up
display.
Call
up
the
split
mode.
KontrolllampeCall
leuchtet
auf
und
das
entsprechende
Pop-Up-Fenster
Call
up
the
split
mode.
up
the
split
mode.
Call
up
the
split
mode.
To call
up
the
split
mode,
press the SPLIT button. Lamp lights and the split is set
Tocall
callup
upthe
thesplit
splitmode,
mode,press
pressthe
theSPLIT
SPLITbutton.
button.
Lamp
lights
and
the
split
isset
set
erscheint. To
Lamp
lights
and
the
split
is isset
To
call
up
the
split
mode,
press
the
SPLIT
button.
Lamp
lights
and
the
split
on. The split pop-up display
appears.
on.
Thesplit
splitpop-up
pop-up
displayappears.
appears. der Lautstärke (60) wird
on.
The
display
on.
The
split
pop-up
display
appears.
2. Drücken Sie
ENTER,
die
Grundeinstellung
Move the cursor to volume value in the split pop-up display.
angezeigt. Move
Movethe
thecursor
cursorto
tovolume
volumevalue
valueinin
inthe
thesplit
split
pop-up
display.
pop-up
display.
Move
the
cursor
to
volume
value
the
split
display.
Press
the ENTER
button
in
the
splitWünschen
pop-up
display
until
thepop-up
cursorindem
goes
toSie
volume
3. Stellen SiePress
die
Lautstärke
nach
Ihren
(0-100)
ein,
die
Press
the
ENTER
button
in
the
split
pop-up
display
until
the
cursor
goes
to
volume
volume
Pressthe
theENTER
ENTER
buttonininthe
thesplit
splitpop-up
pop-updisplay
displayuntil
untilthe
thecursor
cursorgoes
goestoto
volume
value
(default
60).button
Tasten DATA
+ (default
oder
-60).
benutzen.
Wenn Sie die Tasten gleichzeitig drücken,
value
(default
60).
value
value
(default
60).
Adjust the split
voice volume. Halten Sie eine der Tasten
wird die Grundeinstellung
wiederhergestellt.
Adjust
theVolume
splitvoice
voice
volume.
Adjust
the
split
volume.
Adjust
the
split
voice
volume.
Adjust
the
split
by using
the DATA
UP and DOWN buttons
.
gedrückt, um
die
Einstellung
kontinuierlich
vorzunehmen.
Das
Pop-UpAdjust
the
split
Volume
by
using
theDATA
DATA
UP
and
DOWN
buttons
Adjust
the
split
Volume
by
using
the
UP
and
DOWN
buttons
. .. return to the
Adjust
the
split
Volume
by
using
the
DATA
and
DOWN
buttons
If you press both DATA UP and DOWN
buttons
atUP
the
same
time automatically
Fenster kehrt
3both
Sekunden
zum
Hauptmenü
zurück.
Wenn
Sie
jedoch
you
press
bothDATA
DATA
UP
and
DOWN
buttons
at
the
same
time
automatically
return
to
the
default
Split
Volume(60).
The
range
of
volume
is 0 ~at100.
IfIfIfnach
you
press
UP
and
DOWN
buttons
the
same
time
automatically
return
toto
the
you
press
both
DATA
UP
and
DOWN
buttons
at
the
same
time
automatically
return
the
default
Split
Volume(60).
The
range
of
volume
is
0
~
100.
default
Split
Volume(60).
The
range
of
volume
is
0
~
100.
Hold
the button
for continuous
decrementing
die Funktiondefault
„Display
Hold“
aktivieren,
bleibt
Split
Volume(60).
The range
of volume
isor0 incrementing.
~das
100. Pop-Up-Fenster dauerhaft
Hold
the
buttonfor
forcontinuous
continuous
decrementing
or
incrementing.
Hold
button
decrementing
oror
incrementing.
If
thethe
DISPLAY
HOLD
is on, the
pop-up display
does not return to main menu and the LCD
Hold
the
button
for
continuous
decrementing
incrementing.
stehen undscreen
kehrt
nicht
zum
Hauptmenü
zurück.
the
DISPLAY
HOLD
on,the
thepop-up
pop-up
display
does
not
return
to
main
menu
and
the
LCD
shows
the current
pop-up
display.
IfIfIfthe
DISPLAY
HOLD
isisison,
display
does
not
return
toto
main
menu
and
the
LCD
the
DISPLAY
HOLD
on,
the
pop-up
display
does
not
return
main
menu
and
the
LCD
screenshows
shows„Display
thecurrent
currentpop-up
pop-up
display.
4. Wenn die Funktion
Hold“
aktiviert ist, kehren Sie zum
screen
the
display.
screen
shows
the
current
pop-up
display.
Press the EXIT button.
Returnindem
to the main
menu.
Hauptmenü zurück,
Sie
EXIT
drücken.
Anderenfalls
kehrt das
Press
the
EXIT
button.
Return
tothe
the
main
menu.
Press
the
EXIT
button.
Return
to
main
menu.
Even
if you don't
press
the EXIT
button,
the pop-up
display
automatically returns to the main
Press
the
EXIT
button.
Return
to
the
main
menu.
menu
3 seconds.
But
if EXIT
the
Display
hold
option
isdisplay
on,
you
should pressreturns
the
EXIT
button
to
Display nach
3 after
Sekunden
selbständig
dorthin
zurück.
Even
you
don'tpress
press
the
EXIT
button,
the
pop-up
display
automatically
returns
to
the
main
Even
ifififyou
don't
the
button,
the
pop-up
automatically
toto
the
main
Even
you
don't
press
the
EXIT
button,
the
pop-up
display
automatically
returns
the
main
return
toafter
the main
menu.
menuafter
seconds.
Butifififthe
theDisplay
Displayhold
hold
option
on,
you
should
press
the
EXIT
button
to
menu
But
option
isisis
on,
you
should
press
the
EXIT
button
toto
menu
after333seconds.
seconds.
But
the
Display
hold
option
on,
you
should
press
the
EXIT
button
returnto
tothe
themain
mainmenu.
menu.
return
return
to
the
main
menu.
B. Adjusting the SPLIT VOLUME by using the SPLIT VOLUME UP and DOWN keys.
B.Adjusting
Adjustingthe
theSPLIT
SPLITVOLUME
VOLUMEby
byusing
usingthe
theSPLIT
SPLIT
VOLUME
UP
and
DOWN
keys.
B.
VOLUME
UP
and
DOWN
keys.
B.
Adjusting
SPLIT
VOLUME
by
using
the
SPLIT
VOLUME
UP
and
DOWN
keys.
Call
up thethe
volume
pop-up
display.
Call
up
the
volume
pop-updisplay.
display.
Call
up
the
volume
pop-up
Press
and
hold
down
the SETUP/KEYPAD
button and press the SPLIT VOLUME
Call
up
the
volume
pop-up
display.
UP
orand
DOWN
key.
The
volume
pop-up display
appears.
Press
andhold
hold
down
the
SETUP/KEYPAD
button
and
press
the
SPLIT
VOLUME
Press
down
the
SETUP/KEYPAD
button
and
press
the
SPLIT
VOLUME
Press
and
hold
down
the
SETUP/KEYPAD
button
and
press
the
SPLIT
VOLUME
UPor
orDOWN
DOWNkey.
key.The
Thevolume
volumepop-up
pop-updisplay
display
appears.
UP
appears.
UP
or
DOWN
key.
The
volume
pop-up
display
appears.
Adjust the Split Volume.
Adjust
the split
by using the SPLIT VOLUME UP and DOWN keys .
Adjust
thevolume
SplitVolume.
Volume.
Adjust
the
Split
Adjust
the
Split
Volume.
Adjust
the
split
volume
using
theSPLIT
SPLIT
UP
and
DOWN
keys
Adjust
split
volume
byby
using
the
and
DOWN
keys
. .to the
If youthe
press
both
Volume
UP
and DOWN
Keys VOLUME
atVOLUME
the sameUP
time
automatically
return
Return
Pressthe
theEXIT
EXITbutton.
button.
Returnto
tothe
themain
mainmenu.
menu.Press
Press
the
button.
Return
main
menu.
Even
if you to
don't
press
the EXIT
button,
the pop-up
display
automatically returns to the main
Press
theEXIT
EXIT
button.
Return
tothe
the
main
menu.
Even
if you
don't
press
the
EXIT
button,
theoption
pop-up
display
automatically
returns
tobutton
the main
menu
after
3 don't
seconds.
But
ifEXIT
the
Display
hold
isdisplay
on,
you
should pressreturns
the
EXIT
to
Even
if
you
press
the
button,
the
pop-up
automatically
totothe
menu
after
3
seconds.
But
if
the
Display
hold
option
is
on,
you
should pressreturns
the EXIT
button
to
Even
if
you
don't
press
the
EXIT
button,
the
pop-up
display
automatically
themain
main
return
to
the
main
menu.
menu
after
3
seconds.
But
if
the
Display
hold
option
is
on,
you
should
press
the
EXIT
button
return after
to the3 main
menu.But if the Display hold option is on, you should press the EXIT buttontoto
menu
seconds.
return
to
the
main
menu.
return to the main menu.
B.
Adjusting
SPLIT
by
the
VOLUME
UP
Einstellen der
mit
denVOLUME
Tasten Split
Volume
+ und
B.Lautstärke
Adjustingthe
the
SPLIT
VOLUME
byusing
using
theSPLIT
SPLIT
VOLUME
UPand
andDOWN
DOWN keys.
keys.
B.B.
Adjusting
Adjustingthe
theSPLIT
SPLITVOLUME
VOLUMEby
byusing
usingthe
theSPLIT
SPLITVOLUME
VOLUMEUP
UPand
andDOWN
DOWNkeys.
keys.
Call
up
the
volume
pop-up
display.
Callup
upthe
thevolume
volumepop-up
pop-updisplay.
display.
Call
1. Halten Sie den
Knopf
SETUP/KEYPAD
gedrückt
und
Sie die
Call
up
the
volume
pop-up
display.
Press
and
hold
down
the
SETUP/KEYPAD
and
press
VOLUME
Press and hold down the SETUP/KEYPADbutton
button
anddrücken
press the
the SPLIT
SPLIT
VOLUME
Press
and
hold
down
the
SETUP/KEYPAD
button
and
UP
DOWN
The
volume
pop-up
appears.
UPor
or
DOWN
key.
The
volume
pop-updisplay
display
appears.
Press
and
holdkey.
down
the
SETUP/KEYPAD
button
andpress
pressthe
theSPLIT
SPLITVOLUME
VOLUME
Tasten SPLIT
VOLUME
+
oder
-.
UP
or
DOWN
key.
The
volume
pop-up
display
appears.
UP or DOWN key. The volume pop-up display appears.
2. Justieren Sie
die
Lautstärke
Hilfe der Tasten SPLIT VOLUME + oder Adjust
the
Split
Volume.
Adjust
theSplit
Splitmit
Volume.
Adjust
the
Adjust
the
SplitVolume.
Volume.
Adjust
the
split
volume
by
VOLUME
UP
(0-100). Wenn
Sie
Tasten
gleichzeitig
drücken,
wird
die
Adjust
thedie
split
volume
byusing
usingthe
theSPLIT
SPLIT
VOLUME
UPand
andDOWN
DOWN keys
keys ..
Adjust
the
split
volume
by
using
the
SPLIT
VOLUME
UP
and
DOWN
keys
..
Adjust
the
split
volume
by
using
the
SPLIT
VOLUME
UP
and
DOWN
keys
If
you
press
both
Volume
UP
and
DOWN
Keys
at
the
same
time
automatically
return
Grundeinstellung
Sie
eine
gedrückt,
If you wiederhergestellt.
press both Volume UP and Halten
DOWN Keys
at the
sameder
timeTasten
automatically
return to
to the
the
If
you
press
both
Volume
UP
and
DOWN
Keys
at
the
same
time
automatically
return
totothe
default
split
Volume(60).
default
split
Volume(60).
If
you
press
both
Volume
UP
and
DOWN
Keys
at
the
same
time
automatically
return
the
um die Einstellung
kontinuierlich
vorzunehmen.
Das
Pop-Up-Fenster
default
split
Volume(60).
The
ofofvolume
Therange
range
volumeisis 00~~100.
100.
default
split Volume(60).
range
ofofvolume
isis0 0~Hauptmenü
kehrt nach 3The
Sekunden
zum
zurück.
Wenn Sie jedoch die
The
volume
~100.
100.decrementing
Hold
the
for
or
Holdrange
thebutton
button
forcontinuous
continuous
decrementing
orincrementing.
incrementing.
Hold
the
button
continuous
ororincrementing.
Hold
theHold“
buttonfor
for
continuousdecrementing
decrementing
incrementing.
Display
Hold
Display
Hold
Funktion „Display
aktivieren,
bleibt
das
Pop-Up-Fenster
dauerhaft
Display
Hold
the
DISPLAY
HOLDisison,
on,the
thepop-up
pop-updisplay
displaydoes
doesnot
notreturn
returnto
tomain
mainmenu
menu and
and the
the LCD
LCD screen
screen
IfIfthe
DISPLAY
HOLD
Display
Hold
If
the
DISPLAY
HOLD
is
on,
the
pop-up
display
does
not
return
to
main
menu
and
stehen undshows
kehrt
zum
Hauptmenü
zurück.
thenicht
current
pop-up
display.
the
current
pop-up
display.
Ifshows
the DISPLAY
HOLD
is on,
the pop-up display
does not return to main menu andthe
theLCD
LCDscreen
screen
shows the
thecurrent
currentpop-up
pop-updisplay.
display.
3. Kehren Sie shows
zum
Hauptmenü
zurück,
indem Sie den SETUP/KEYPADReturn
to
the
main
menu.
Return
to
the
main
menu.
Return
to
the
main
menu.
Knopf wieder
loslassen.
Return
to the main menu.
Release
theSETUP/KEYPAD
SETUP/KEYPAD
button.
Release
the
button.
Release
Releasethe
theSETUP/KEYPAD
SETUP/KEYPADbutton.
button.
Lautstärke der Main-Voice
Die Lautstärke der Main-Voice regeln Sie, wie zuvor unter „Lautstärke der Main-Voice“
beschrieben.
21
21
Ändern der Pedalfunktion
21
21
Die Pedalfunktion können Sie ändern, wie zuvor unter „Ändern der Pedalfunktion“ im
Kapitel „Layer“ beschrieben.
Ändern der Oktaveinstellung
Diese Einstellung können Sie ändern, siehe dazu „Ändern der Oktaveinstellung“ im Kapitel
„Layer“.
Reverb (Hall)
Hierbei handelt es sich um einen Effekt, der das Spielen in einem großen Raum oder einer
Konzerthalle simuliert.
at recreates the decaying reflections of a sound in a performance space, and
mit Reverb
l ambience of Spielen
a concert hall.
FF
Drücken Sie REVERB um den Effekt einzuschalten. Die Kontrolllampe leuchtet auf und
das Pop-Up-Fenster erscheint.
ss the REVERB button. The lamp lights and reverb is set on. The reverb pop-up
ess the REVERB
lamp turns
off and reverb(or
chorus)
no
Umbutton
den again.
EffektThe
wieder
abzuschalten,
drücken
Sieis erneut
erlischt.
VERB TYPE
ton. The reverb pop-up display appears in the LCD screen.
b type by using the DATA UP and DOWN buttons in the reverb pop-up display.
ay shows the current reverb type and total depth of the reverb.
in the piano. Room 1, Room 2(default), Room 3, Hall 1, Hall 2, Plate, Delay and Pan Delay
n the reverb is on, press and hold down the SETUP/KEYPAD button and press
he reverb pop-up display appears.
REVERB. Die Kontrolllampe
To turnAuswahl
off reverb, press
theReverbs
REVERB button again. The lamp turns off and reverb(or chorus) is no
eines
longer active.
Drücken Sie REVERB um den Effekt einzuschalten und wählen Sie dann im Pop-Up-
SELECTING
TYPE
Fenster REVERB
mit Hilfe der
Tasten DATA + oder - den gewünschten Hall aus. Das Pop-Up-
Press the
REVERBzeigt
button.
The gegenwärtig
reverb pop-up display
appears in Hall
the LCD
screen.
Fenster
den
eingestellten
und
dessen Level. Das Piano verfügt
Select a desired reverb type by using the DATA UP and DOWN buttons in the reverb pop-up display.
über 8 verschiedene Reverbs: Room 1, Room 2 (Werkseinstellung), Room 3, Halle 1,
The reverb pop-up display shows the current reverb type and total depth of the reverb.
2, types
Plate,
und1, Room
Pan2(default),
Delay.Room 3, Hall 1, Hall 2, Plate, Delay and Pan Delay
There Halle
are 8 reverb
in theDelay
piano. Room
In the meantime, when the reverb is on, press and hold down the SETUP/KEYPAD button and press
Wenn der Halleffekt eingeschaltet ist, können Sie SETUP/KEYPAD gedrückt halten und
the REVERB button. The reverb pop-up display appears.
dann
imcan
Fenster
mitby
den
Tasten
oderbuttons
- die Art
des
Reverbs
ändern. Wenn Sie
The reverb
type
be changed
using
DATA DATA
UP and +
DOWN
in this
pop-up
display.
wieder
kehrt das
Fenster
zum
Hauptmenü zurück.
ReleaseSETUP/KEYPAD
the the SETUP/KEYPAD
button,loslassen,
the pop-up display
returns
to the main
menu.
Wenn Sie die Funktion „Display Hold“ einschalten, bleibt das Pop-Up-Fenster stehen und
Display Hold
kehrtHOLD
nicht
automatisch
Hauptmenü
zurück.
If the DISPLAY
is on,
the pop-up displayzum
does not
return to main menu
and the LCD screen shows the current pop-up
display.
Einstellen des Reverb-Levels
ADJUSTING THE TOTAL DEPTH
ADJUSTING
TOTAL
DEPTH
determines
theTHE
total depth
of the
reverb.
1. Halten SieThis
den
Knopf SETUP/KEYPAD
gedrückt,
das Pop-Up-Fenster
ADJUSTING
THE
DEPTH
This determines the
totalTOTAL
depth of the
reverb.
This determines the total depth of the reverb.
erscheint. ADJUSTING
Call up the SETUP/KEYPAD
mode.
THE TOTAL DEPTH
the
SETUP/KEYPAD
mode.
2. Justieren Sie
das
Hall-Level
Tasten
DEPTH
+ oder
23Hilfe
ThisCall
determines
the
total
depth
of der
the
reverb.
Press
and up
hold
down
themit
SETUP/KEYPAD
button.REVERB
The setup pop-up
appears
in
Call
up
the
SETUP/KEYPAD
mode.
Press
and
hold
down
the
SETUP/KEYPAD
button. Thewird
setupdie
pop-up appears in
the LCD Sie
screen.
- (0-100). Wenn
die
Tasten
gleichzeitig
drücken,
Press
and
hold
down
the SETUP/KEYPAD
button. The setup pop-up appears in
theCall
LCD
screen.
up
thewiederhergestellt.
SETUP/KEYPAD
mode.
Grundeinstellung
(50)
Halten Sie eine der Tasten
theAdjust
LCD screen.
the
total
depth.
Press and hold down the SETUP/KEYPAD button. The setup pop-up appears in
Adjust
the totalbydepth.
gedrückt, um
die
Einstellung
kontinuierlich
vorzunehmen.
Das Pop-UpAdjust
the
total
using the REVERB
DEPTH UP and DOWN
keys .
the Adjust
LCD
screen.
thedepth
total depth.
Adjust
the
total
depth
by
using
the
REVERB
DEPTH
UP
and
DOWN
keys .
Fenster kehrt
nach
3 Sekunden
zum
zurück.
Wenn
Sie
If you
press
both
UP
and DOWN
Keys the
at Hauptmenü
the
same timeDEPTH
automatically
return
to the default
Adjust
the total
depth
by
using
REVERB
UP and
DOWN
keys
. reverb
Adjust
the
total
depth.
(50). both
Ifdepth
you press
UP and DOWN
Keys
at the same time
automatically
return
to the default reverb
jedoch dietotal
Funktion
„Display
Hold“
aktivieren,
bleibt
das
Pop-Up-Fenster
If you
press
both
UPisand
DOWN
Keysthe
at the
same time
automatically
return
to thekeys
default
Adjust
the
total
depth
using
REVERB
DEPTH
UP and
DOWN
. reverb
The
range
of
volume
0 ~by
100.
total
depth
(50).
total
depth
(50).
dauerhaft stehen
und
kehrt
zum
Hauptmenü
zurück.
Hold
the
button
for continuous
decrementing
or incrementing.
The
range
of volume
is 0nicht
~ 100.
yourange
pressof
both
UP and
Keys atdisplay
the same
time
return
toand
the the
default
volume
is
0DOWN
~ the
100.pop-up
IfIfThe
the
DISPLAY
HOLD
is on,
does
notautomatically
return to main
menu
LCDreverb
screen
Hold
the button
for continuous
decrementing
or
incrementing.
3. Kehren Sie
zum
Hauptmenü
zurück,
indem
Sie
den
SETUP/KEYPADtotal
depth
(50).
Hold
button
for continuous
ordoes
incrementing.
shows
thethe
current
pop-up
display.
If the
DISPLAY
HOLD
is on, thedecrementing
pop-up display
not return to main menu and the LCD screen
The
range
of
volume
is
0
~
100.
If the
DISPLAY
on, the pop-up display does not return to main menu and the LCD screen
Knopf wieder
loslassen.
shows
the
current HOLD
pop-upisdisplay.
Hold
thecurrent
button
for continuous
decrementing or incrementing.
shows
the
pop-up
display.
Return
to
the
play
mode.
If the DISPLAY HOLD is on, the pop-up display does not return to main menu and the LCD screen
Return
to
the
play
mode.
Release
SETUP/KEYPAD
button.
showsReturn
thethe
current
display.mode.
topop-up
the play
Release the SETUP/KEYPAD button.
Release
the SETUP/KEYPAD
button.
Return
to the playfür
mode.
Einstellen des
Reverb-Levels
einzelne
Instrumente
Reverb
Reverb
Reverb
Reverb
ADJUSTING
THE DEPTH
FOR EACH PART
Release the SETUP/KEYPAD
button.
ADJUSTING
THE
DEPTH
EACH
PART
The
reverb part depth
parameter
letsFOR
you make
different
reverb depth setting for
ADJUSTING
THE
DEPTH
FOR
EACH
PART
Sie können den
Hall
auch
für
die
einzelnen
Instrumente
gesondert
einstellen,
Therhythm,
reverb
part depth
parameter
lets
you
make
different
reverb
depth
setting
for z.B. für den
the
bass
and
chord
parts
of
the
auto-accompaniment,
asdepth
well assetting
the for
The
reverb
part
depth
parameter
lets
you
make
different
reverb
Rhythmus, Bass,
Chords
und
ADJUSTING
THE
DEPTH
EACH PART as well as the
the rhythm,
and
chord
parts ofFOR
the auto-accompaniment,
parts
you
playbass
from
keyPiano.
board.
1.
the reverb
rhythm,part
bassdepth
and chord
parts of the auto-accompaniment, as well as the
The
parameter
parts you play
from key
board. lets you make different reverb depth setting for
parts
you
play
from
key
board.
the
rhythm,
bass
and
chord
parts
the
auto-accompaniment,
as well as the
CallKnopf
up theSETUP/KEYPAD
SETUP/KEYPADofmode.
Halten Sie den
gedrückt,
das Pop-Up-Fenster
parts
you
play
from
key
board.
Call
the
SETUP/KEYPAD
mode.
and up
hold
down
the SETUP/KEYPAD
button. The setup pop-up appears in
erscheint. Press
Call
up
the
SETUP/KEYPAD
mode.
the
LCDand
screen.
Press
hold down the SETUP/KEYPAD button. The setup pop-up appears in
Press
and hold
the SETUP/KEYPAD
thedown
SETUP/KEYPAD
mode.button. The setup pop-up appears in
theCall
LCDup
screen.
the
LCD
screen.
Press
and
thedepth
SETUP/KEYPAD
button. The setup pop-up appears in
Call
uphold
thedown
reverb
pop-up display.
the LCD
screen.
Call
up
the
reverb
depth
pop-up
display.
PressCall
the REVERB
or DOWN
key. The
reverb depth pop-up appears.
up the DEPTH
reverbUP
depth
pop-up
display.
The reverb
depth pop-up
display
called up
from
thereverb
reverb pop-up
Press
the REVERB
DEPTH
UPcan
orbe
DOWN
key.
The
depthdisplay.
pop-up appears.
Press
the
REVERB
DEPTH
UP
orpop-up
DOWN
key. press
The
reverb
depth
pop-up
appears.
Call
up
the pop-up
reverb
depth
pop-up
display.
When
the
LCD
screen
the
reverb
display,
thereverb
ENTER
button.
The reverb
depth popThe
reverb
depthshows
display
can be called
up from the
pop-up
display.
The
reverb
depth
pop-up
display
can
be
called
up
from
the
reverb
pop-up
display.
up
appears.
Press
REVERB
or DOWN
key. The
reverb
depth
pop-up
appears.
When the
the LCD
screen DEPTH
shows theUP
reverb
pop-up display,
press
the ENTER
button.
The reverb
depth popWhen
the LCD screen shows the reverb pop-up display, press the ENTER button. The reverb depth popup appears.
reverb depth pop-up display can be called up from the reverb pop-up display.
upThe
appears.
Move
the
cursor
toreverb
the desired
part.
When
the LCD
screen
shows the
pop-up display,
press the ENTER button. The reverb depth popup appears.
Press
the ENTER
button until
thedesired
cursor is part.
located at the desired part.
Move
the cursor
to the
Move the cursor to the desired part.
Press the ENTER button until the cursor is located at the desired part.
Press the ENTER button until the cursor is located at the desired part.
The
reverb
part
depth
parameter
lets
youauto-accompaniment,
make
different
reverbas
depth
ADJUSTING
THE
DEPTH
FOR
EACH
PART
the
rhythm,
bass
andchord
chord
partsof
ofthe
the
wellassetting
asthe
the for
the
rhythm,
bass
and
parts
auto-accompaniment,
as well
the
rhythm,
bass
and
chord
parts
of
the
auto-accompaniment,
as
well
as
the
The
reverb
part
depth
parameter
lets
you
make
different
reverb
depth
setting
for
parts
you
playfrom
fromkey
keyboard.
board.
parts
you
play
parts
you play
from
board.
the rhythm,
bass
andkey
chord
parts of the auto-accompaniment, as well as the
parts
you
play
from
key board.
Call
up
the
SETUP/KEYPAD
mode.
Call
up
the
SETUP/KEYPAD
mode.
Call
up
the
SETUP/KEYPAD
mode.
Press
and
hold
down
the
SETUP/KEYPAD
button.The
Thesetup
setuppop-up
pop-upappears
appearsinin
Press and hold down the SETUP/KEYPAD button.
Press
and
hold
the SETUP/KEYPAD
Call
up
thedown
SETUP/KEYPAD
mode.button. The setup pop-up appears in
the
LCD
screen.
the
LCD
screen.
2. Drücken Sie
REVERB
DEPTH
+ oder - (0-100).
the
LCD
screen.
Press
and
hold down
the SETUP/KEYPAD
button.Ein
ThePop-Up-Fenster
setup pop-up appears in
erscheint. the
SieLCD
können
dieses
Fenster
auch
aufrufen,
screen.
Call up the reverb depth pop-up display. indem Sie ENTER
Call
Call up
up the
the reverb
reverb depth
depth pop-up
pop-updisplay.
display.
drücken. Press
the
REVERBDEPTH
DEPTHUP
UPororDOWN
DOWNkey.
key.The
Thereverb
reverbdepth
depthpop-up
pop-upappears.
appears.
Press the
REVERB
Press
the
REVERB
DEPTH
UP
orcan
DOWN
key.
The
reverb
depth
pop-up
appears.
Call
up
the
reverb
depth
pop-up
display.
3. Drücken Sie
ENTER
bis
dasdisplay
Instrument
erscheint,
das
Sie
einstellen
The
reverb
depth
pop-up
display
called
up
from
the
reverb
pop-up
display.
The
reverb
depth
pop-up
can
bebe
called
up
from
the
reverb
pop-up
display.
Thethe
reverb
depth
pop-up
display
can
be
called
up from
the
reverb
pop-up
display.
When
the
LCD
screen
shows
the
reverb
pop-up
display,
press
the
ENTER
button.
The
reverb
depthpoppopPress
the
REVERB
DEPTH
UP
orpop-up
DOWN
key.
The
reverb
depth
pop-up
appears.
LCD
screen
shows
the
reverb
display,
press
the
ENTER
button.
The
reverb
depth
möchten. When
When
the LCD screen shows the reverb pop-up display, press the ENTER button. The reverb depth popup
appears.
up
appears.
The
reverb
depth
pop-up
display
can
be
called
up
from
the
reverb
pop-up
display.
appears.
4. Benutzen up
Sie
die Tasten REVERB DEPTH + oder - um das Hall-Level
When the LCD screen shows the reverb pop-up display, press the ENTER button. The reverb depth popup
appears.
einzustellen.Move
Sie
können
auch
Move
thecursor
cursor
todie
theTasten
desiredDATA
part. + oder - dazu
the
to
the
desired
part.
Move
the
cursor
to
the the
desired
part.
Press
the
ENTER
button
untilthe
cursorisislocated
located
thedesired
desired
part.
Press
the
ENTER
button
until
cursor
atatthe
part.
verwenden.
Wenn
Sie
die
Tasten
gleichzeitig
drücken,
wird
die
Press
the ENTER
buttonto
until
cursor ispart.
located
at the desired
part.
Move
the cursor
thethe
desired
Grundeinstellung
Voice
70,the
Layer
Voice
70,atSplit
Voicepart.
70, Chords
Press
the (Main
ENTER
button
until
the
cursor
is located
the desired
Adjust
thedepth
depthof
selected
part.
Adjust
the
part.
Adjust
the
depth
ofofthe
the selected
selected
part.
70, Bass 20,
Drum
40)
wiederhergestellt.
Halten
Sie
eine
der
Tasten
Adjust
the
UP
Adjust
thedepth
depthofofthe
theselected
selectedpart
partbybyusing
usingthe
theREVERB
REVERBDEPTH
DEPTH
UPand
and
Adjust
the depth
of the selected
part by using
the REVERB DEPTH UP and
Adjust
the
depth
of
the
selected
part.
gedrückt, DOWN
um
die
Einstellung
kontinuierlich
vorzunehmen.
Das
Pop-Upkeys
. .
DOWN
keys
DOWN
keysdepth
.
Adjust
the
of UP
the
selected
part
by
using
the
REVERB
DEPTH
UPSie
andjedoch
You
can
use
the
DATA
and
DOWN
buttons
instead
ofof
the
REVERB
UP
and
DOWN
keys.
You
can
use
the
DATA
UP
and
DOWN
buttons
instead
the
REVERBDEPTH
DEPTH
UP
and
DOWN
keys.
Fenster kehrt
nach
3
Sekunden
zum
Hauptmenü
zurück.
Wenn
You
can
use
the
DATA
UPDOWN
and DOWN
buttons
instead
ofautomatically
the REVERB
DEPTH
UP anddefault
DOWN
keys.
DOWN
keys
.both
If you
press
both
UPUP
and
Keys
atat
the
same
time
return
If you
press
and DOWN
Keys
the
same
time
automatically
returntotothe
the defaultreverb
reverb
If
you
press
both
UP
and
DOWN
Keys
at
the
same
time
automatically
return
to
the
default
reverb
die Funktion
„Display
Hold“
aktivieren,
bleibt
das
Pop-Up-Fenster
dauerhaft
depth
each
(default
Voice
70,70,
Layer
Voice
70,70,
Split
Voice
70,70,
Chord
parts
70,70,
Bass
20,20,
Drum
40)
depth
of
each
part.
(default
Main
Voice
Layer
Voice
Voice
Chord
parts
Bass
Drum
40)
Youof
can
usepart.
the
DATA
UPMain
and
DOWN
instead
ofSplit
the
REVERB
DEPTH
UP
DOWN
keys.
depth
of
each
(default
Main
Voice
70,buttons
Layer Voice
70, Split
Voice
70, Chord
parts
70,and
Bass
20, Drum
40)
range
ofpart.
volume
is
The
range
of
volume
is0 ~
0 100.
~ 100.Keys at the same
If
you
press
both
UP
and
DOWN
time
automatically
return
to
the
default
reverb
stehen und The
kehrt
nicht
zum
Hauptmenü
zurück.
The range
of volume
is 0 ~ 100.decrementing or incrementing.
Hold
the
button
continuous
Hold
the
button
for
continuous
decrementing
or incrementing.
each
part.for
(default
Main Voice
70, Layer Voice
Split Voice 70, Chord parts 70, Bass 20, Drum 40)
Holdofthe
button
for
continuous
decrementing
or 70,
incrementing.
5. Kehren Siedepth
Hauptmenü
zurück,
indem
Sie
den
SETUP/KEYPADIfzum
the
DISPLAY
HOLD
is on,
the
pop-up
display
does
not
return
totomain
If
the
DISPLAY
HOLD
the
pop-up
display
does
not
return
mainmenu
menuand
andthe
theLCD
LCDscreen
screen
The
range
of
volume
~on,
100.
If the DISPLAY HOLDisis0ison,
the
pop-up
display
does
not
return
to main
menu
and
the
LCD
screen
shows
thethe
current
pop-up
display.
shows
current
pop-up
display.decrementing or incrementing.
Hold
button
for
continuous
Knopf wieder
loslassen.
shows
the current
pop-up
display.
If the DISPLAY HOLD is on, the pop-up display does not return to main menu and the LCD screen
shows
the current
pop-up
display.
Return
to
play
Return
playmode.
mode.
Return
toto
play
mode.
Release
the
Release
theSETUP/KEYPAD
SETUP/KEYPADbutton.
button.
Release
the
SETUP/KEYPAD
Return
to
play mode.button.
Release the SETUP/KEYPAD button.
Effekt
24
24
24
Dieser Regler verleiht dem Sound zusätzliche Fülle.24Es gibt acht verschiedene Chorus-
Arten: Chorus 1, 2, 3, 4, Feedback, Flanger, Short Delay und Feedback Delay.
s to the sound. There are four different Chorus types: Chorus 1, 2, 3, 4 , Feedback, Flanger
k Delay.
Spielen mit Effekt
F
Drücken Sie EFFECT um den Effekt einzuschalten. Die Kontrolllampe leuchtet auf und
das Pop-Up-Fenster erscheint.
s the EFFECT button. The lamp lights and effect is set on. The effect pop-up
s the EFFECT button
again.
The lamp
turnsabzuschalten,
off and effect is nodrücken
longer active.
Um den
Effekt
wieder
Sie
erneut EFFECT. Die Kontrolllampe
erlischt.
FECT TYPE
on. The effect Auswahl
pop-up display
appears
in the LCD screen.
eines
Effekts
type by using the DATA UP and DOWN buttons in the effect pop-up display.
y shows the current effect type and total depth of the effect.
Sie3, Chorus
EFFECT
um
den
Effekt
n the piano. ChorusDrücken
1, Chorus 2,Chorus
4 , Feedback,
Flanger
Short
delay andeinzuschalten
Feedback Delay
und wählen Sie dann im Pop-UpFenster mit Hilfe der Tasten DATA + oder - den gewünschten Effekt aus. Das Pop-Upn the effect is on, press and hold down the SETUP/KEYPAD button and press
Fenster zeigt den gegenwärtig eingestellten Effekt und dessen Level. Das Piano verfügt
he effect pop-up display appears.
überDATA
8 verschiedene
Room
1,display.
Room 2 (Werkseinstellung), Room 3, Halle 1,
changed by using
UP and DOWN Reverbs:
buttons in this
pop-up
Halle
Plate,display
Delay
undtoPan
Delay.
P/KEYPAD button,
the2,
pop-up
returns
the main
menu.
Wenn der Effekt eingeschaltet ist, können Sie SETUP/KEYPAD gedrückt halten und dann
im Fenster mit den Tasten DATA + oder - die Art des Efekts ändern. Wenn Sie SETUP/
KEYPAD wieder loslassen, kehrt das Fenster zum Hauptmenü zurück.
The effect type can be changed by using DATA UP and DOWN buttons in this pop-up display.
Release the the SETUP/KEYPAD button, the pop-up display returns to the main menu.
Display Hold
If the DISPLAY
HOLD
is on,
theFunktion
pop-up display
does not return
to theeinschalten,
main menu and thebleibt
LCD screen
the current popWenn
Sie
die
„Display
Hold“
dasshows
Pop-Up-Fenster
up display.
kehrt nicht automatisch zum Hauptmenü zurück.
Einstellen des
Effekt-Levels
ADJUSTING
THETOTAL
TOTALDEPTH
DEPTH
ADJUSTING
THE
ADJUSTING
THE
ADJUSTING
THE
TOTAL
DEPTH
This
determines
the
total
depth
of
the
effect.
This
determines
the
total
depth
the
effect.
This
determines
the
total
depth
ofof
the
effect.
ADJUSTING
THE
TOTAL
DEPTH
This
determines
the
total
depth
of
the
effect.
ADJUSTING
THE
TOTAL
DEPTH
1. Halten SieThis
den
Knopf
SETUP/KEYPAD
gedrückt,
das Pop-Up-Fenster
determines
the
total
effect.
ADJUSTING
THE
TOTAL
DEPTH
Call
up
the
SETUP/KEYPAD
mode.
This
determines
the
totaldepth
depthofofthe
the
effect.
Call
the
SETUP/KEYPAD
Call
upup
the
SETUP/KEYPAD
mode.
25
erscheint.Press
Call
up
the
SETUP/KEYPAD
mode.
This
determines
thethe
total
depth
of the
effect.
Press
and
hold
down
the
SETUP/KEYPAD
button.
The
setuppop-up
pop-upappears
appearsinin
Press
and
hold
down
the
SETUP/KEYPAD
button.
and
hold
down
SETUP/KEYPAD
button.
The
setup
Call
up
the
SETUP/KEYPAD
mode.
Press
and
hold
down
the
SETUP/KEYPAD
button.EFFECT
The setup DEPTH
pop-up appears
in
Call
up
the
SETUP/KEYPAD
mode.
2. Justieren the
Sie
das
Hall-Level
mit
Hilfe der
Tasten
+ oder
the
LCD
screen.
the
LCD
screen.
LCD
screen.
Press
and
hold
down
the
SETUP/KEYPAD
button.
The
setup
pop-up
appears
in
Call
up
the
SETUP/KEYPAD
mode.
the
LCD
screen.
Press and
hold
down
the SETUP/KEYPAD
button. Thewird
setupdie
pop-up appears in
- (0-100). Wenn
Sie
die
Tasten
gleichzeitig drücken,
Adjust
the
total
depth.
the
LCD
screen.
Press
and
hold
down
the
SETUP/KEYPAD button. The setup pop-up appears in
Adjust
the
total
depth.
Adjust
the
total
depth.
the
LCD
screen.
Adjust
the
total
Grundeinstellung
(50)
wiederhergestellt.
Halten
SieUP
eine
der
Tasten
Adjust
the
total
depth
by
using
the
EFFECT
DEPTH
the
LCD
screen.
Adjust
the
total
depth
bydepth.
using
the
EFFECT
DEPTH
and
keys
Adjust
the
total
depth
by
using
the
EFFECT
DEPTH
UP
andDOWN
DOWN
keys. .
Adjust
the
total
depth.
Adjust
the
total
depth
by
using
the
EFFECT
DEPTH
UP
and
DOWN
keys .
Adjust
the
total
depth.
gedrückt, um
die
Einstellung
kontinuierlich
vorzunehmen.
Das
Pop-UpIf
you
press
both
UP
and
DOWN
Keys
at
the
same
time
automatically
return
to
the
default
reverb
If you
press
both
UP
and
DOWN
Keys
at at
the
same
time
automatically
return
to thekeys
default
IfAdjust
you
press
both
UP
and
DOWN
Keys
the
same
time
automatically
return
Adjust
the
total
depth
by
using
the
EFFECT
DEPTH
UP
DOWN
. . reverb
the
total
depth.
Adjust
the
total
depth
by
using
EFFECT
DEPTH
UPand
and
DOWN
Ifdepth
you
press
both
UP
and DOWN
Keysthe
atHauptmenü
the
same time
automatically
return
to thekeys
default
reverb
total
depth
(50).
total
(50).
total
depth
(50).
Fenster kehrt
nach
3
Sekunden
zum
zurück.
Wenn
Sie
Adjust
the
total
depth
by
using
DEPTH
UP and
DOWN
. reverb
total
depth
(50).
The
range
ofvolume
volume
0100.
100.
IfThe
you
press
UP
Keys the
at theEFFECT
same time
automatically
return
to thekeys
default
The
range
of both
volume
isand
0is ~0DOWN
range
of
is
~~ 100.
If you press both
UP and DOWN
Keys
at the same time
automatically
to the default reverb
jedoch dietotal
Funktion
„Display
aktivieren,
bleibt
das return
Pop-Up-Fenster
The
range
of
volume
is
0 ~Hold“
100.
the
button
for
continuous
decrementing
or
incrementing.
depth
(50).
Hold
the
button
forfor
continuous
decrementing
oror
incrementing.
Hold
the
button
continuous
decrementing
incrementing.
IfHold
you
press
both
UP
and DOWN
Keys at the same
time automatically return to the default reverb
total
depth
(50).
Hold
the
button
for
continuous
decrementing
or
incrementing.
If
the
DISPLAY
HOLD
is
on,
the
pop-up
display
does
not
return
to
main
menu
and
the
LCD
screen
The
range
of
volume
is
0
~
100.
If the
DISPLAY
HOLD
isison,
pop-up
does
not
return
toto
main
menu and
the
LCD
screen
If the
DISPLAY
HOLD
is0nicht
on,
the
pop-up
display
does
not
return
main
dauerhaft stehen
und
kehrt
zumdisplay
Hauptmenü
zurück.
total
depth
(50).
The
range
of volume
~the
100.
IfThe
the
DISPLAY
HOLD
is
on,
the
pop-up
display
does
not
return
to
main
menu
and
the
LCD
screen
shows
the
current
pop-up
display.
Hold
button
for
continuous
decrementing
or
incrementing.
shows
the
current
pop-up
display.
shows
the
current
pop-up
display.
of volume
is 0 ~zurück,
100. decrementing
Holdrange
the
button
for continuous
or incrementing.
3. Kehren Sieshows
zum
Hauptmenü
indem
Sie
den
SETUP/KEYPADthe
current
pop-up
display.
IfIfHold
the
DISPLAY
HOLD
isis
on,
does
not
the
DISPLAY
HOLD
on,the
thepop-up
pop-updisplay
displayor
does
notreturn
returntotomain
mainmenu
menuand
andthe
theLCD
LCDscreen
screen
the
button
for continuous
decrementing
incrementing.
Return
to
the
play
mode.
shows
the
current
pop-up
display.
Return
to
the
play
mode.
Return
to
the
play
mode.
Knopf wieder
shows
the
current pop-up
If loslassen.
the
DISPLAY
HOLD isdisplay.
on, the pop-up display does not return to main menu and the LCD screen
Return
to
the
play
mode.
shows
the
current
pop-up display.button.
Release
the
SETUP/KEYPAD
button.
Release
the
SETUP/KEYPAD
Release
the
SETUP/KEYPAD
button.
Return
to
Return
tothe
theplay
playmode.
mode.
Release
the SETUP/KEYPAD
button.
Return
to the play mode.
Release
the
button.
Release
theSETUP/KEYPAD
SETUP/KEYPAD
button.
Release
the SETUP/KEYPAD
button.
ADJUSTING
THEDEPTH
DEPTH
FOREACH
EACHPART
PART
ADJUSTING
THE
FOR
ADJUSTING
THE
The
effect
part
depth
parameter
lets
you
makedifferent
ADJUSTING
THE
DEPTH
FOR
EACH
PART
The
effect
part
depth
parameter
lets
you
make
effect
The
effect
part
depth
parameter
lets
you
make
different
effectdepth
depthsetting
settingfor
for
Einstellen des
Effekt-Levels
für
einzelne
Instrumente
The
effect
part
depth
parameter
lets
you
make
different
effect depth
setting
for
ADJUSTING
THE
DEPTH
FOR
EACH
PART
the
rhythm,
bass
and
chord
parts
of
theauto-accompaniment,
auto-accompaniment,
well
the
the
rhythm,
bass
and
chord
parts
of
the
asaswell
asasthe
the
rhythm,
bass
and
chord
parts
of
the
auto-accompaniment,
ADJUSTING
THE
DEPTH
FOR
EACH
PART
The
effect
part
depth
parameter
lets
you
different
effect
setting
the
rhythm,
bass
and
chord
parts
of
themake
auto-accompaniment,
as well
as for
the
The
effect
part
depth
parameter
lets
you
make
different
effectdepth
depth
setting
for
parts
you
play
from
key
board.
ADJUSTING
THE
DEPTH
FOR
EACH
PART
parts
you
play
from
key
board.
parts
you
play
from
key
board.
the
bass
and
parts
ofofyou
the
auto-accompaniment,
asaswell
asasthe
Therhythm,
effect
part
depth
parameter
lets
make
different gesondert
effect depth
setting
for
parts
you play
from
keychord
board.
the
rhythm,
bass
and
chord
parts
the
auto-accompaniment,
well
the
Sie können den
Effekt
auch
für
die
einzelnen
Instrumente
parts
you
play
from
key
board.
the
rhythm,
bass
and
chord
parts
of
the
auto-accompaniment,
as
well
as
the
parts
you
play
from
key
board.
Call
up
the
SETUP/KEYPAD
Call
up
the
SETUP/KEYPAD
Call
up
the
SETUP/KEYPAD
mode. und Piano.
einstellen, z.B.
für
den
Rhythmus,
Bass, mode.
Chords
Call
up
the
SETUP/KEYPAD
mode.
parts
you
play
from
key
board.
Press
and
hold
down
the
SETUP/KEYPAD
button.
The
setuppop-up
pop-upappears
appearsinin
Press
and
hold
down
the
SETUP/KEYPAD
button.
The
setup
Press
and
hold
down
the
SETUP/KEYPAD
button.
Call
up
the
SETUP/KEYPAD
mode.
Press
and
hold
down
the SETUP/KEYPAD
button. The setup pop-up appears in
Call
up
the
SETUP/KEYPAD
mode.
the
LCD
screen.
the
LCD
screen.
the
LCD
screen.
and
hold
down
the
button.
pop-up
Call
up
the
SETUP/KEYPAD
mode.
1. Halten SiePress
den
Knopf
SETUP/KEYPAD
gedrückt,
das
Pop-Up-Fenster
the
LCD
screen.
Press
and
hold
down
theSETUP/KEYPAD
SETUP/KEYPAD
button.The
Thesetup
setup
pop-upappears
appearsinin
the
LCD
screen.
Press
and
hold
down
the
SETUP/KEYPAD
button.
The
setup
pop-up
appears
in
the
LCD
screen.
erscheint.
Call
upup
the
effect
depth
pop-up
Call
up
the
effect
depth
pop-updisplay.
the
LCD
screen.
Call
the
effect
depth
pop-up
display.
2. Drücken Sie
EFFECT
+oroder
- key.
(0-100).
Eindepth
Pop-Up-Fenster
Call
up
theDEPTH
effect
depth
pop-up
display.
Press
the
EFFECT
DEPTH
UP
DOWN
The
effect
Press
the
EFFECT
DEPTH
UP
or
DOWN
key.
The
effect
Press
the
EFFECT
DEPTH
UP
or
DOWN
key.
The
effect
depthpop-up
pop-upappears.
appears.
Call
up
the
effect
depth
pop-up
display.
Call
up
the
effect
depth
pop-up
display.
erscheint. Press
Sie
können
dieses
Fenster
auch
aufrufen,
indem
Sie ENTER
the
EFFECT
DEPTH
UP
or
DOWN
key.
The
effect
depth
pop-up
The
effect
depth
pop-up
display
can
bebe
called
upup
from
the
effect
pop-up
display.
The
effect
depth
pop-up
display
can
be
called
up
from
the
effect
pop-up
The
effect
depth
pop-up
display
can
called
from
the
effect
pop-up
display. appears.
Call
up
the
effect
depth
pop-up
display.
Press
the
EFFECT
DEPTH
UP
or
DOWN
key.
The
effect
depth
pop-up
appears.
the
LCD
screen
shows
the
effect
pop-up
display,
press
the
ENTER
button.
The
effect
depth
pop-up
When
the
LCD
screen
shows
the
effect
pop-up
display,
press
the
ENTER
button.
The
effect
depth
pop-up
display
can
be
called
up
from
the
effect
pop-up
display.
Press
the
EFFECT
DEPTH
UP
or
DOWN
key.
The
effect
depth
pop-up
appears.
When
the
LCD
screen
shows
the
effect
pop-up
display,
press
the
ENTER
button.
The
effect
depth
pop-up
drücken. When
appears.
appears.
The
effect
depth
pop-up
display
can
be
called
up
from
the
effect
pop-up
display.
When
the
LCD
screen
shows
the
effect
pop-up
display,
press
the
ENTER
button.
The effect
depth pop-up
appears.
Press
DEPTH
UP can
or DOWN
The
effect
depth
pop-up
appears.
The the
effectEFFECT
depth pop-up
display
be calledkey.
up from
the
effect
pop-up
display.
3. Drücken Sie
ENTER
bispop-up
dasdisplay
Instrument
erscheint,
das
Sie
einstellen
When
the
LCD
screen
shows
pop-up
display,
press
the
ENTER
button.
The
appears.
When
the
LCDdepth
screen
showsthe
theeffect
effect
pop-up
display,
press
the
ENTER
button.
Theeffect
effectdepth
depthpop-up
pop-up
The
effect
can
be called
up from
the
effect
pop-up
display.
appears.
appears.
möchten. When
Move
the
cursor
the
desired
part.
the LCD
screen
showsto
the
effect
pop-up
display,
press the ENTER button. The effect depth pop-up
Move
the
cursor
to
the
desired
Move
the
cursor
to
the
desired
part.
appears.
Move
the
cursor
tountil
the
desired
part.
the
ENTER
button
until
the
cursor
is is
located
the
part.
Press
the
ENTER
button
until
the
cursor
is
located
Press
the
ENTER
button
the
cursor
thedesired
desired
part.
4. BenutzenPress
Sie
die
Tasten
EFFECT
DEPTH
+located
oderon
-onum
das
Effekt-Level
Move
the
the
desired
part.
Move
thecursor
cursor
to
the
desired
part.
Press
the ENTER
buttonto
until
the
cursor is
located on the desired part.
einzustellen.
Sie
können
auch
die
Tasten
DATA
+ oder
-desired
dazupart.
Press
the
button
until
the
cursor
located
Move
the
cursor
to
the
desired
Press
theENTER
ENTER
button
until
the
cursorisispart.
located
onthe
thedesired
part.
Adjust
the
depth
of
the
selected
part.
Adjust
the
depth
of
the
selected
Adjust
the
depth
of
the
selected
part. on
verwenden.
Wenn
Sie
die
Tasten
gleichzeitig
drücken,
wird
die
Press
the
ENTER
button
until
the
cursor
is
located
on
the
desired
part.
Adjust
the
depth
of
the
selected
part.
Adjust
the
depth
ofof
the
selected
part
byby
using
the
EFFECT
DEPTH
and
DOWN
Adjust
the
depth
of
the
selected
part
by
using
the
Adjust
the
depth
the
selected
part
using
the
EFFECT
DEPTHUP
UP
and
DOWNkeys
keys. .
Adjust
the
depth
of
the
selected
part.
Adjust
theof
depth
of
the
selected
part.
Adjust
the(Main
depth
the selected
part
by using
the
EFFECT
DEPTH
UP 70,
and DOWN
keys0,
.
Grundeinstellung
Voice
70,
Layer
Voice
70,
Split
Voice
Chords
You
can
useuse
thethe
DATA
UPUP
and
DOWN
buttons
instead
ofof
the
EFFECT
DEPTH
UPUP
and
DOWN
keys.
You
can
use
the
DATA
UP
and
DOWN
buttons
instead
of
the
EFFECT
DEPTH
You
can
the
DATA
and
DOWN
buttons
instead
the
EFFECT
DEPTH
and
DOWN
keys.
Adjust
the
depth
of
the
selected
part
by
using
the
EFFECT
DEPTH
UP
and
DOWN
keys
..
Adjust
depth
of
the
selected
part.
Adjust
the
depth
of
the
selected
part
by
using
the
EFFECT
DEPTH
UP
and
DOWN
keys
If you press both UP and DOWN Keys at the same time automatically return to the default effect
you
press
both
UPand
and
DOWN
Keysbuttons
at the
the same
same
time
automatically
returnUP
toand
the DOWN
default keys.
effect
You
canpress
use the
DATA
UP and
DOWN
instead
of the
EFFECT DEPTH
IfIfyou
both
UP
DOWN
Keys
at
time
automatically
return
Adjust
the
depth
ofand
the
selected
part
byVoice
using
the
EFFECT
DEPTH
UP
and
DOWN
keys
depth
ofcan
each
part.
Main
Voice
70,
Layer
70,
Split
Voice
70,70,
Chord
parts
Bass
0, 0,
Drum
0)0) .
You
use
the
DATA
UP
and
DOWN
buttons
instead
of
the
EFFECT
DEPTH
UP
and
DOWN
keys.
depth
of
each
part.
(default
Main
Voice
70,
Layer
Voice
70,
Split
Voice
70,
Chord
IfYou
you
press
both
UP
DOWN
Keys
at
the
same
time
automatically
return
to0,
the
default
effect
depth
of
each
part.
(default
Main
Voice
70,
Layer
Voice
70,
Voice
Chord
parts
0,
Bass
Drum
can
use
the(default
DATA
UP
and
DOWN
buttons
instead
ofSplit
the
EFFECT
DEPTH
UP
and
DOWN
keys.
The
range
of part.
volume
isand
0is ~0DOWN
100.
IfIf
you
press
both
UP
Keys
at
the
same
time
automatically
return
to
the
default
effect
The
range
of
volume
0
~
100.
depth
of
each
(default
Main
Voice
70,
Layer
Voice
70,
Split
Voice
70,
Chord
parts
0,
Bass
0,
Drum
The
range
of
volume
is
~
100.
you
press
both
UP
and
DOWN
Keys
at
the
same
time
automatically
return
to
the
default
effect
You can use the DATA UP and DOWN buttons instead of the EFFECT DEPTH UP and DOWN keys.0)
Hold
the
button
for
continuous
decrementing
or
incrementing.
depth
of
part.
(default
Voice
70,
Layer
70,
Voice
parts
0,0,Drum
0)0)
the
button
for
continuous
decrementing
or
incrementing.
The
range
of
volume
is
0 Main
~DOWN
100.
Hold
the
button
for
decrementing
or
incrementing.
depth
ofeach
each
part.
(default
Main
Voice
70,
Layer
Voice
70,Split
Split
Voice70,
70,Chord
Chord
parts
0,Bass
Bass
Drum
IfHold
you
press
both
UPcontinuous
and
Keys
at
the Voice
same
time
automatically
return
to0,the
default
effect
IfThe
the
DISPLAY
HOLD
on,
the
pop-up
display
not
return
toto
the
main
menu
and the
range
ofofpart.
volume
isis
100.
the
DISPLAY
HOLD
on,
the
pop-up
display
does
not
return
the
main
theLCD
Hold
the
button
for
continuous
decrementing
ordoes
incrementing.
IfIf the
DISPLAY
HOLD
on,
the
pop-up
display
does
not
return
the
The
range
volume
is0is
0is~~
100.
depth
of
each
(default
Main
Voice
70, Layer
Voice
70, Split
Voice
70,to
Chord
parts
0,menu
Bass 0,and
Drum
0)LCD
screen
shows
the
current
pop-up
display.
Hold
the
button
for
decrementing
ororincrementing.
screen
shows
the
current
pop-up
display.
IfHold
the
DISPLAY
HOLD
the
pop-up display
does not return to the main menu and the LCD
screen
shows
the
current
pop-up
display.
the
button
forcontinuous
continuous
decrementing
incrementing.
The
range
of
volume
isis
0on,
~ 100.
IfHold
DISPLAY
HOLD
isison,
pop-up
screen
shows
the current
pop-up
display.
Ifthe
the
DISPLAY
HOLD
on,the
the
pop-updisplay
display
doesnot
notreturn
returntotothe
themain
mainmenu
menuand
andthe
theLCD
LCD
the
button
for continuous
decrementing
ordoes
incrementing.
screen
shows
the
pop-up
screen
shows
thecurrent
current
pop-up
display.
If the
DISPLAY
HOLD
is on, display.
the
pop-up display does not return to the main menu and the LCD
Return
toto
play
mode.
Return
to
play
mode.
Return
play
mode.
screen
shows the
current
pop-up
display.
Return
to
play mode.button.
Release
the
SETUP/KEYPAD
Release
the
SETUP/KEYPAD
button.
Release
the
SETUP/KEYPAD
button.
Return
to
Return
toplay
playmode.
mode.button.
Release
the SETUP/KEYPAD
Return
to play mode.button.
Release
the
Release
theSETUP/KEYPAD
SETUP/KEYPAD
button.
Release the SETUP/KEYPAD button.
2626
stehen und
Effect
Effect
Effect
Effect
Effect
Effect
Adjust the depth of the selected part.
Adjust the depth of the selected part by using the EFFECT DEPTH UP and DOWN keys .
You can use the DATA UP and DOWN buttons instead of the EFFECT DEPTH UP and DOWN keys.
If you press both UP and DOWN Keys at the same time automatically return to the default effect
depth of each part. (default Main Voice 70, Layer Voice 70, Split Voice 70, Chord parts 0, Bass 0, Drum 0)
The range of volume is 0 ~ 100.
Hold0)
the wiederhergestellt.
button for continuous decrementing
or incrementing.
Bass 0, Drum
Halten
Sie eine der Tasten gedrückt,
If the DISPLAY HOLD is on, the pop-up display does not return to the main menu and the LCD
um die Einstellung
kontinuierlich
vorzunehmen. Das Pop-Up-Fenster
screen shows the
current pop-up display.
kehrt nach 3 Sekunden zum Hauptmenü zurück. Wenn Sie jedoch die
Funktion „Display
aktivieren,
ReturnHold“
to play
mode. bleibt das Pop-Up-Fenster dauerhaft
stehen und
kehrtthenicht
zum Hauptmenü
Release
SETUP/KEYPAD
button. zurück.
5. Kehren Sie zum Hauptmenü zurück, indem Sie den SETUP/KEYPADKnopf wieder loslassen.
26
Metronom
Das Piano verfügt über ein eingebautes Metronom, das sich ideal zum Üben eignet. Sie
können es ein- und ausschalten, indem Sie den Knopf METRONOME drücken.
cticing.
Mit Hilfe der Tasten TEMPO + und - können Sie das Tempo des Metronoms zwischen 40
und 250 bpm einstellen. Wenn Sie die Tasten gleichzeitig drücken, wird das Originaltempo
Press the METRONOME button
des Songs
metronome pop-up
display. wiederhergestellt. Änderungen am Performance-Bildschirm oder einiger Werte
können zur Verlangsamung des Tempos führen.
Im Metronom befinden sich vier Parameter, die Sie einstellen können. Drücken Sie
ME
using the TEMPO
buttons.
METRONOME
um das entsprechende Pop-Up-Fenster aufzurufen. Drücken Sie ENTER,
der Cursor zeigt daraufhin einen Parameter an. Über die Tasten DATA + und - können Sie
default tempo of the selected rhythm.
zwischen den folgenden Parametern wechseln:
w.
1. Beat (legt die Taktart fest)
2.display.
Tempo
onome pop-up
3. the
First
Beatvalue
Volume
e cursor goes to
option
and (Lautstärke des ersten Beats)
UP and DOWN
buttons.
4. Other Beats Volume (Lautstärke der übrigen Beats).
e.
t beat.
her beats.
Sie können das Metronom-Fenster auch aufrufen, indem Sie die Taste SETUP/KEYPAD
gedrückt halten und dann den METRONOME-Knopf drücken.
Das Pop-Up-Fenster
für den Beat erscheint und zeigt
AD button and METRONOME
button.
n and press the METRONOME
button.
Durch Drücken des Knopfes ändert sich der Wert.
metronome.
eel
den aktuell eingestellten Wert.
Der beste Bereich liegt zwischen 2 und 8.
Pitchbender
h of a sound. This makes it possible to add a
Er ermöglicht das Verziehen der Tonhöhe um dem Sound,
beispielsweise eines Saxophons, einen Hauch von Realismus zu
verleihen. Halten Sie eine Klaviertaste gedrückt und bewegen Sie
our left hand
den Pitchbender vor oder zurück. Wenn Sie das Rad loslassen, wird
die normale Tonhöhe wiederhergestellt.
al pitch.
Beim Sound von Saxophonen oder elektrischen Gitarren erhalten Sie
den maximal realistischen Soundeffekt, wenn Sie gleichzeitig spielen
und den Pitchbender betätigen. Sie können den Bereich des
ffects can be produced if you play notes and
Bendings einstellen. Details dazu entnehmen Sie bitte dem Kapitel
„Änderung
des Pitchbend-Bereichs“. Schalten Sie nicht das Piano an, während Sie den
range of the PITCH BEND
wheel.
Pitchbender betätigen. Der Effekt kann für Main- und Layer-Voice eingesetzt werden.
Setup
Setup
Setup
Tune
Setup
Setup
TUNEMit Hilfe der
Tuning-Funktion können Sie Feineinstellungen an der Tonhöhe vornehmen
The tune function lets you make fine adjustments to the pitch, allowing you to accurately match the
um die Stimmung exakt anderen Instrumenten anpassen zu können.
tuning with that of other instruments.
TUNE
The tune function lets you make fine adjustments to the pitch, allowing youSetup
to accurately match the
Press and
hold down
SETUP/KEYPAD
button and press
the TUNEund
UP or
DOWN button.
Halten
Sie the
die
Taste
gedrückt
drücken
Sie TUNE + oder -.
tuning
with
that ofSETUP/KEYPAD
other instruments.
SetupPress and hold down the SETUP/KEYPAD button and press the TUNE UP or DOWN button.
TUNE
The
lets appears
you make
fine adjustments
Thetune
Tunefunction
pop-up display
and shows
current value. to the pitch, allowing you to accurately match the
tuning
with
that
of otherbyinstruments.
The value
can
be changed
pressing TUNE UP and DOWN buttons.
erscheint
und
zeigt
den
aktuellen
Wert
Diesen
You canDas
adjustPop-Up-Fenster
the value
by using the DATA
UP and DOWN
buttons
instead
of the
TUNE UP and
DOWNan.
buttons.
The Tune pop-up display appears and shows current value.
können Sie über
Sie die Tasten
Range: A3 440Hz ¡¾You
100cents
(Default
can adjust
the00)
value by using the DATA UP and DOWN buttons instead of the TUNE UP and DOWN buttons.
Hz(Hertz)
gleichzeitig
drücken,
wird
der
Wert
auf
die
Werkseinstellung
zurückgesetzt.
If you press both UP and DOWN buttons at the same time automatically return to the default value.
The pitch is measuredRange:
in unitsA3
of Hertz
(abbreviated
Hz),
which represents
the number of times the sound wave vibrates in a second.
440Hz
¡¾ 100
100cents
(Default
00)
Bereich:
A3
440
cents
(Grundeinstellung
00).
Cent Cent is unit of pitch,
equal
toHz
1/100 of
a seminote.
Hz(Hertz)
Backing
Up adjusted
value.
The
last
value
of each
Function can
retained
in memory.
Die
Tonhöhe
inadjusted
Hertz
(Hz)
angegeben
und
besagt,
wie oft
dietheWelle
in der
Sekunde
The
pitchwird
is measured
in units
of Hertz
(abbreviated
Hz), be
which
represents
the number
of times
sound wave
vibrates
in a second.
If the DISPLAY HOLDCent
is on,Cent
the is
pop-up
main menu and the LCD screen shows the current pop-up
unit ofdisplay
pitch,does
equalnot
toreturn
1/100 to
of the
a seminote.
display. schwingt.
Backing Up adjusted value. The last adjusted value of each Function can be retained in memory.
If the DISPLAY
on, the pop-upund
displayentspricht
does not returneinem
to the main
menu and the LCD
screen shows
the current pop-up
Cent ist die
EinheitHOLD
deris Tonhöhe
Hundertstel
eines
Halbtons.
display.
The Tune
pop-up
display
appears
and
shows
current
value.
Der zuletzt eingestellte Wert einer Funktion kann im Speicher verbleiben. Die Funktion
TRANSPOSE
The value can be changed by pressing TUNE UP and DOWN buttons.
The
function
makes
it's
possible
to shift
theinstead
pitchofof
keyboard
in seminote
units,
Hold“
kann
aktiviert
werden.
Youtranspose
can„Display
adjust the
value
by using
the DATA
UP and DOWN
buttons
thethe
TUNE
UP and DOWN
buttons.
TRANSPOSE
If you
press
bothdown
UP and
DOWN
buttons
at the same
time automatically
toTUNE
the default
Press
and
hold
SETUP/KEYPAD
button
and
the
UPvalue.
or DOWN
button. Wenn
Thethe
value
can
be
pressing
TUNEpress
UPreturn
and
DOWN
buttons.
die
Tasten
TUNE
+/-changed
oderbyaber
über
die
Tasten
DATA
+/- ändern.
If you press
both
and DOWN
same
time automatically
to the
value.
allowing
you
toUPmatch
thebuttons
pitchatofthethe
keyboard
to thereturn
range
ofdefault
other
instruments or singers, or
The100cents
transpose
function
makes it's possible to shift the pitch of the keyboard in seminote units,
Range:
A3 440Hz
00) key without
letting
you
easily¡¾play
in a(Default
different
having to change your fingering. For example, if the
allowing you to match the pitch of the keyboard to the range of other instruments or singers, or
Hz(Hertz)
TRANSPOSE
is set
Finkey,
playing
C results
in
awhich
pitchrepresents
of key
F, orwithout
in other words,
youchange
canwave
play
in the
key of C
The pitch is measured
units
of Hertz
(abbreviated
the numberhaving
of times the
vibrates
in a second.For example, if the
letting
you
easily
play in Hz),
a different
to sound
your
fingering.
major
on
the
keyboard
and
automatically
have
the
pitch
transposed
to
F
major.
Cent Cent is unit TRANSPOSE
of pitch, equal tois1/100
a seminote.
set Fofkey,
playing C results in a pitch of F, or in other words, you can play in the key of C
Backing
Up adjusted
value.
The last
adjusted and
value automatically
of each Function can
be retained
in memory.
Transposition
major
on the
keyboard
have
the pitch
transposed to F major.
If theand
DISPLAY
on, the
pop-up display doesbutton
not return
to the
mainthe
menu
and the LCD screen
the current
pop-up
Press
holdHOLD
downis the
SETUP/KEYPAD
and
press
TRANSPOSE
UP orshows
DOWN
button.
display.
and hold
down the SETUP/KEYPAD
button
and press
the TRANSPOSE UP or
button. so
Diese Press
Funktion
ermöglicht,
die Tonhöhe des
Pianos
in Halbtonschritten
zuDOWN
verändern,
dass Sie es der Stimmung anderer Instrumente oder Sänger anpassen können. Sie
TRANSPOSE
The transpose
function
it'sinpossible
to shift theTonart
pitch of
the keyboard
seminote
units, ändern zu
können
so denmakes
Song
einer anderen
spielen
ohne in
Ihren
Fingersatz
allowingmüssen.
you to match
the
pitch
of
the
keyboard
to
the
range
of
other
instruments
or
singers,
Wenn z.B. Transpose F gewählt ist, ertönt ein F, wenn Sie ein Corspielen. In
letting you easily play in a different key without having to change your fingering. For example, if the
anderen
Sie
können
inother
C-Dur
spielen
und
es of
transponiert
auf
TRANSPOSE
is set FWorten:
key, playing
C results
in a das
pitch Stück
of F, or in
words,
you can
playhören
in the key
C
The
Transpose
pop-up
display
appears
and
shows
current
value.
major onDur.
the keyboard and automatically have the pitch transposed to F major.
F-
The value can be changed
by pressing
TRANSPOSE
UP and DOWN
buttons.
The Transpose
pop-up
display appears
and shows
current value.
You can adjust the value by using the DATA UP and DOWN buttons instead of the TRANSPOSE UP and DOWN buttons.
The value can be changed by pressing TRANSPOSE UP and DOWN buttons.
Press
and
hold
the
SETUP/KEYPAD
button
and press
thetoTRANSPOSE
UP or DOWN button.
If you
press
bothdown
UP and
buttons
the same
timethe
automatically
the default
value.
YouDOWN
can adjust
the at
value
by using
DATA UPreturn
and DOWN
buttons
instead of the TRANSPOSE UP and DOWN buttons.
Halten Sie die Taste SETUP/KEYBOARD gedrückt und drücken Sie TRANSPOSE +/-.
Range: -12 seminoteIf~you
0 ~press
12 seminote
00) buttons at the same time automatically return to the default value.
both UP(Default
and DOWN
Backing Up adjusted
value.-12
The
last adjusted
of each Function
can be retained in memory.
Range:
seminote
~ 0 ~value
12 seminote
(Default 00)
adjusted
value.
adjusted
valuemenu
of each
be shows
retained
memory.
If the DISPLAY HOLDBacking
is on, theUp
pop-up
display
doesThe
not last
return
to the main
andFunction
the LCD can
screen
theincurrent
pop-up
If the DISPLAY HOLD is on, the pop-up display does not return to the main menu and the LCD screen shows the current pop-up
display.
display.
The Transpose pop-up display appears and shows current value.
The value can be changed by pressing TRANSPOSE UP and DOWN buttons.
erscheint
und
zeigt
den
aktuellen
Diesen
You canDas
adjustPop-Up-Fenster
the value by using the DATA
UP and DOWN
buttons
instead
of the
TRANSPOSEWert
UP andan.
DOWN
buttons. können Sie
28
If you press both UP and DOWN buttons at the same time automatically return to the28
default value.
die
Tasten
TRANSPOSE
+/oder
aber
über
die
Tasten
DATA
+/ändern.
Wenn Sie
Range: -12 seminote ~ 0 ~ 12 seminote (Default 00)
Backing
Up
adjusted
value.
The
last
adjusted
value
of
each
Function
can
be
retained
in
memory.
Tasten gleichzeitig drücken, wird der Wert auf die Werkseinstellung zurückgesetzt.
If the DISPLAY HOLD is on, the pop-up display does not return to the main menu and the LCD screen shows the current pop-up
display. Bereich: -12/0/+12 (Grundeinstellung 00).
über
die
Der zuletzt eingestellte Wert einer Funktion kann im Speicher verbleiben. Die Funktion
„Display Hold“ kann aktiviert werden, das Pop-Up-Display bleibt dauerhaft stehen.
28
Oktaveinstellung
Setup Diese Funktion macht es möglich, die Tonhöhe des Pianos um eine ganze Oktave zu
erhöhen oder zu vermindern, um es dem Bereich anderer Instrumente anzupassen.
OCTAVE SHIFT
The octave
makes it's possible to shift the octave of the keyboard, allowing you to match the
Fürfunction
die Main-Voice
octave of the keyboard to the range of other instruments.
Changing
of the maingedrückt
voice. und drücken Sie OCTAVE + oder -.
Halten the
Sie octave
SETUP/KEYPAD
Press and hold down the SETUP/KEYPAD button and press the OCTAVE UP or DOWN button.
Setup
OCTAVE SHIFT
The
octave
pop-up
display
appears
shows
current
The
octave
function
makes
it's and
possible
to
shiftvalue.
the
the keyboard,
allowing
match the
Das
Pop-Up-Fenster
erscheint
undoctave
zeigtofden
aktuellen
Wert you
an.toDiesen
können Sie über
You can adjust the value by using the DATA UP and DOWN buttons instead of the OCTAVE UP and DOWN buttons.
octave
of
the
keyboard
to
the
range
of
other
instruments.
diecanTasten
OCTAVE
+/- oder
aber
die Tasten DATA +/- ändern. Wenn Sie die Tasten
The value
be changed
by pressing OCTAVE
UP and
DOWNüber
buttons.
If you press both UP and DOWN buttons at the same time automatically return to the default value.
gleichzeitig
drücken, wird der Wert auf die Werkseinstellung zurückgesetzt.
Changing
Range:
-1 ~0 ~+1 the
octaveoctave
(Default 0)of the main voice.
Press
and
hold
down
the
SETUP/KEYPAD
button
presscan
the
or DOWN button.
Backing
Up
adjusted
value.
The (Grundeinstellung
last adjusted value
of eachand
Function
beOCTAVE
retained in UP
memory.
Bereich: -1/0/+1
0).
If the DISPLAY HOLD is on, the pop-up display does not return to the main menu and the LCD screen shows the current pop-up display.
Der zuletzt eingestellte Wert einer Funktion kann im Speicher verbleiben. Wenn die
Funktion
Hold“
ist, bleibt
dassplit
Pop-Up-Display
dauerhaft stehen und kehrt
Changing
the„Display
octave of
the aktiviert
layered voice
ant the
voice.
nicht
automatisch
zum
Hauptmenü
zurück.
Press the ENTER button in the octave pop-up display. The cursor goes to the other part and you can
change the octave of the selected part by using OCTAVE UP and DOWN buttons.
The octave pop-up display appears and shows current value.
You can adjust the value by using the DATA UP and DOWN buttons instead of the OCTAVE UP and DOWN buttons.
Für
Split-Voice
The value
canLayerbe changedoder
by pressing
OCTAVE UP and DOWN buttons.
If you press both UP and DOWN buttons at the same time automatically return to the default value.
The
sound
timbre
can be
adjusted
by using the BRILLIANCE function.
Range:
-1 ~0
~+1 octave
(Default
0)
Drücken
ENTER
im Oktaven-Fenster.
Cursor
wechselt zum anderen Teil
Backing
Up adjustedSie
value.
The last adjusted
value of each Function can Der
be retained
in memory.
If theand
DISPLAY
is on,the
the
pop-up
display
notbutton
return to and
the main
menu
and
the LCD screen
shows
thevon
currentOCTAVE
pop-up
display.+ oder können
die
Oktave
desdoes
ausgewählten
Teils
durch
Drücken
Press
holdHOLD
down
SETUP/KEYPAD
press
the
BRILLIANCE
UP or
DOWN
button.
BRILLIANCE
und Sie
verändern.
Changing the octave of the layered voice ant the split voice.
Press the ENTER button in the octave pop-up display. The cursor goes to the other part and you can
change the octave of the selected part by using OCTAVE UP and DOWN buttons.
Brilliance
The brilliance pop-up display appears and shows current value.
BRILLIANCE
This
function
affectscan
all voice
parts (main,by
Layer
and split)BRILLIANCE function.
The
sound
timbre
be adjusted
using
Sie
Timbre
einesthe
dieser Funktion verändern.
The value
cankönnen
be changeddas
by pressing
BRILLIANCE
UPSound
and DOWNmit
buttons.
You canHalten
adjust theSie
valueSETUP/KEYPAD
by using the DATA UP and DOWN
buttonsund
insteaddrücken
of the BRILLIANCE
UP and DOWN buttons.
gedrückt
Sie zusätzlich
BRILLIANCE
Press
hold
down
the SETUP/KEYPAD
The and
default
value
is 00, which
is normal brilliance. button and press the BRILLIANCE UP or DOWN button.
+/-.
Whenever press both BRILLIANCE UP and DOWN buttons, default value '00' is set automatically.
If the brilliance is low, the piano makes dark sound and If it is high, the piano makes bright sound.
Backing Up adjusted value. The last adjusted value of each Function can be retained in memory.
If the DISPLAY HOLD is on, the pop-up display does not return to the main menu and the LCD screen shows the current pop-up
display.
The brilliance pop-up display appears and shows current value.
This function affects all voice parts (main, Layer and split)
Das
Pop-Up-Fenster
erscheint
und
zeigt
den aktuellen Wert an. Diese Funktion betrifft alle
The value
can be
changed by pressing BRILLIANCE
UP and
DOWN
buttons.
You canSounds
adjust the value
by
using
the
DATA
UP
and
DOWN
buttons
instead
of the
and DOWN buttons.+/- oder aber über
(Main, Layer, Split). Sie können über
dieBRILLIANCE
TastenUP
BRILLIANCE
The default value is 00, which is normal brilliance.
diepress
Tasten
DATA UP
+/-andändern.
Diedefault
Grundeinstellung
ist 0. Wenn die Brilliance niedriger ist,
Whenever
both BRILLIANCE
DOWN buttons,
value '00' is set automatically.
If the brilliance
is
low,
the
piano
makes
dark
sound
and
If
it
is
high,
the
piano
makes
bright
wird der Sound dunkler, wenn sie höher ist, heller. sound.
Backing Up adjusted value. The last adjusted value of each Function can be retained in memory.
Der zuletzt
eingestellte
Wert
einer
Funktion
kann
imLCDSpeicher
If the DISPLAY
HOLD is on,
the pop-up display
does not
return to
the main menu
and the
screen shows verbleiben.
the current pop-upWenn die
display. Funktion „Display Hold“ aktiviert ist,
29 bleibt das Pop-Up-Display dauerhaft stehen und kehrt
nicht zum Hauptmenü zurück.
Setup
PITCHÄndern
BEND des Pitchbend-Bereichs
This determines the pitch bend range and the voice part for applying the pitch bend.
Setup
Setup
Changing
the
pitchSie
bend
range.
Hier
können
den
maximalen Umfang des Pitchbenders festlegen. Halten Sie den
PITCH
BEND
Specified
the maximum
change
in a tone
can be
applied
using the
wheel. Press and
This
determines
the
pitch
bend
range
and that
the
voice
part
forPITCH
applying
thePITCH
pitch+BEND
bend.
Knopf
SHIFT
gedrückt
und
drücken
Sie
BEND
oder-.
PITCH
BEND
hold down
the SHIFT button and press the PITCH BEND UP or DOWN button.
This determines
pitchbend
bend range
and the voice part for applying the pitch bend.
Changing
thethe
pitch
range.
Specified the maximum change in a tone that can be applied using the PITCH BEND wheel. Press and
Changing the pitch bend range.
hold
downthe
themaximum
SHIFT button
andinpress
the
PITCH
BEND
UP or
DOWN
Specified
change
a tone
that
can be
applied
using
the button.
PITCH BEND wheel. Press and
hold down the SHIFT button and press the PITCH BEND UP or DOWN button.
The Pitch bend pop-up display appears and shows current value.
Das
erscheint
und
zeigt
den
aktuellen
Diesen
You can
adjustPop-Up-Fenster
the value by using the DATA
UP and DOWN
buttons
instead
of the
PITCH BENDWert
UP andan.
DOWN
buttons. können Sie über
The value can be changed by pressing PITCH BEND UP and DOWN buttons.
die Tasten PITCH BEND +/- oder aber über die Tasten DATA +/- ändern.
The default value is 2, which is 2 seminotes. The setting range is 00(no change) to 12 (12 seminote)
The
Pitch
bend
pop-up
display
appears
and
current
value.value '2'Der
Whenever
press
both PITCH
BEND
UP and
DOWN
buttons,
default
is set automatically.
Die
Grundeinstellung
istshows
2and
(2
Halbtöne).
Bereich
geht von 0 (keine Änderung) bis 12
You
can adjust
the value
by using
the
DATA
UPvalue
DOWN
buttons
instead
the PITCH
BEND UP and DOWN buttons.
Backing
Up
adjusted
value.
The
last
adjusted
of
each
Function
can beofretained
in memory.
The
Pitch
bend
pop-up
display
appears
and
shows
current
value.
Halbtöne.
SiePITCH
die BEND
Tasten
PITCH
BEND
+ und
- screen
gleichzeitig
drücken,
The
value
can beHOLD
changed
by
pressing
UP and
DOWN
If the
DISPLAY
isWenn
on,
the
pop-up
display
not
return
to thebuttons.
main
menu
and
the LCD
shows
the current
pop-up wird die
You
can
adjust
theisvalue
by using
the DATA
UPdoes
and
DOWN
buttons
instead
of the
PITCH
BEND
UP and
DOWN
buttons.
The
default
value
2, which
is 2 seminotes.
The
setting
range
is 00(no
change)
to 12
(12 seminote)
display.
Grundeinstellung
wieder
aufgerufen.
The
value can
beboth
changed
pressing
PITCH
BEND
UP and
DOWN
buttons.
Whenever
press
PITCHby
BEND
UP and
DOWN
buttons,
default
value
'2' is set automatically.
The default
is 2, which
isThe
2 seminotes.
The
setting
range
isFunktion
00(no change)
to 12 (12im
Backing
Upvalue
adjusted
value.
last adjusted
value
of
each Function
can be kann
retained
inseminote)
memory.
Der
zuletzt
eingestellte
Wert
einer
Speicher verbleiben. Wenn die
press
both
PITCH
BEND
UP and
DOWN
buttons,
default
'2' ismenu
set automatically.
Applying
the
pitch
bend
todisplay
each
voice
part.
IfWhenever
the DISPLAY
HOLD
is on, the
pop-up
does
not return
tovalue
the main
and the LCD screen shows the current pop-up
Funktion
„Display
Hold“
aktiviert
ist,
bleibt
das
Pop-Up-Display
Backing
UpLCD
adjusted
value.
The last
value ofpop-up
each Function
can be
retained
memory.
display.
During
the
screen
shows
theadjusted
pitch bend
display,
press
the in
ENTER
button. dauerhaft stehen.
If the DISPLAY HOLD is on, the pop-up display does not return to the main menu and the LCD screen shows the current pop-up
The cursor goes to the voice part option.
display.
Applying
pitch
bend
to each
voice
part.
You canSie
set the
voice
part for
applying
the pitch
bend
by den
usingverschieden
the PITCH BENDSounds
UP and DOWN
keys.
können
den
Pitchbend-Bereich
(Main,
Layer, Split) gesondert
During the LCD screen shows the pitch bend pop-up display, press the ENTER button.
Applying
the pitch
bendSie
to each
voice part.
zuweisen,
indem
im Pop-Up-Fenster
ENTER drücken bis Sie zum entsprechenden
The
value
can
bescreen
changed
by pressing
PITCH bend
BEND UP
and DOWN
buttons.
The
cursor
goes
to
the voice
part
During
the
LCD
shows
the option.
pitch
pop-up
display,
press the ENTER
button.
Parameter
gelangen.
Die
Einstellung
funktioniert
wieBEND
oben
beschrieben.
canset
adjust
the part
value for
by using
the DATA
and bend
DOWNby
buttons
instead
of the PITCH
UP and
DOWNkeys.
buttons.
YouYou
can
voice
applying
theUP
pitch
using
the PITCH
BEND
UP
and
DOWN
TheDefault
cursorvalue
goesMAIN
to the
voice
option.
VOICE
: ON,part
LAYER
VOICE: ON, SPLIT VOICE: OFF
both
PITCH
UP andthe
DOWN
buttons,
default
value ofthe
thePITCH
selectedBEND
voice part
set automatically.
YouWhenever
can setpress
voice
part
forBEND
applying
pitch
bend
by using
UPisand
DOWN keys.
The
valueUp
canadjusted
be changed
by pressing
PITCH BEND
buttons.
Backing
value.
The last adjusted
valueUP
of and
eachDOWN
Function
can be retained in memory.
You
can
adjust the
value
by the
using
the DATA
UPdoes
andnot
DOWN
buttons
instead
of the
PITCH
BEND
UP shows
and DOWN
buttons.
If the
DISPLAY
HOLD
is on,
pop-up
display
return
to thebuttons.
main menu
and
the LCD
screen
the current
pop-up
The
value
can
be
changed
by
pressing
PITCH
BEND
UP
and
DOWN
Default value MAIN VOICE : ON, LAYER VOICE: ON, SPLIT VOICE: OFF
display.
You
can adjust
the
value
by BEND
using the
DATA
UP and
DOWN
buttons
instead
of the PITCH
BEND
UPautomatically.
and DOWN buttons.
Whenever
press
both
PITCH
UP
and
DOWN
buttons,
default
value
of
the
selected
voice
part
is
set
DefaultPedalfunktionen
value
MAIN VOICE
VOICE: value
ON, SPLIT
VOICE:
OFF can be retained in memory.
Backing
Up adjusted
value.: ON,
TheLAYER
last adjusted
of each
Function
pressHOLD
both PITCH
BEND
UP and
DOWN
buttons,
default
of the
selected
partscreen
is set automatically.
IfWhenever
the DISPLAY
is on, the
pop-up
display
does
not return
tovalue
the main
menu
andvoice
the LCD
shows the current pop-up
Backing Up adjusted value. The last adjusted value of each Function can be retained in memory.
display.
One
of
8
pedal-functions
can
be
assigned
to
the
assignable
pedal.
Dem
programmierbaren
Pedal
können
acht
Funktionen
zugewiesen
If the DISPLAY HOLD is on, the pop-up display does not return to the main menu and the LCD screen shows the current werden.
pop-up
display. Halten Sie den Knopf SETUP/KEYPAD gedrückt und drücken Sie zusätzlich den
PEDAL
Knopf
Press and hold down the SETUP/KEYPAD button and press the PEDAL button.
PEDAL
PEDAL.
The
pop-up display appears
and
shows current
touch
value.
One
ofpedal
8 pedal-functions
can be
assigned
to the
assignable
pedal.
PEDAL
Press the
PEDAL
button again, the cursor goes
to the next pedal
function
anddie
the selected
function
is set to the assignable
pedal. Sie PEDAL
Das
Pop-Up-Fenster
erscheint
und
zeigt
aktuelle
Funktion.
Drücken
One
of 8 pedal-functions
can
assigned
tobe
the
assignable
pedal.UP and DOWN buttons.
Instead
of the PEDAL button,
thebe
setting
value can
changed
by the DATA
Press and
hold down the
button
and press the
button.Statt PEDAL können Sie auch die
wiederholt
umSETUP/KEYPAD
zwischen den
Funktionen
zu PEDAL
wechseln.
The pedal pop-up display appears and shows current touch value.
Tasten
DATA
+/benutzen.
Press
hold down
the SETUP/KEYPAD
and
press
the
button.
Pressand
the
PEDAL
button
again,
the cursor
goes to thebutton
next pedal
function
and
thePEDAL
selected function
is set to the assignable pedal.
The pedal
display
appears
and shows
value.
Instead
of pop-up
the PEDAL
button,
the setting
valuecurrent
can betouch
changed
by the DATA UP and DOWN buttons.
Press the PEDAL button again, the cursor goes to the next pedal function and the selected function is set to the assignable pedal.
Instead of the PEDAL button, the setting value can be changed by the DATA UP and DOWN buttons.
Assignable 8 pedal functions. (see the CONNECTING PEDAL SECTION on page 6.)
Assignable 8 pedal functions. (see the CONNECTING PEDAL SECTION on page 6.)
Folgende Funktionen können dem Pedal zugewiesen werden:
Assignable 8 pedal functions. (see the CONNECTING PEDAL SECTION on page 6.)
30
30
30
Touch
Diese Funktion bestimmt, in wie weit Ihre Anschlagsstärke die Lautstärke des Sounds
beeinflusst. Sie haben 10 verschieden Einstellungsmöglichkeiten, so dass Sie den
Anschlag exakt an das Stück, den Sound und Ihr Spielgefühl anpassen können.
Setup
TOUCH
Touch determines
howdes
yourAnschlags
playing strength (velocity) affects the volume of the voices.
Einstellen
10 types are available for tailoring the keyboard response to the selected voice, type of song, or your
own playing preference.
Halten Sie SETUP/KEYPAD und drücken Sie TOUCH. Das Pop-Up-Fenster erscheint und
zeigtthe
den
aktuellen Wert an. Drücken Sie erneut TOUCH um zur nächsten Einstellung zu
Selecting
touch
wechseln.
des TOUCH-Knopfes
können
auch DAT +/- benutzen.
Press and
hold down Anstelle
the SETUP/KEYPAD
button and press the
TOUCHSie
button.
The touch
displayeingestellte
appears and shows
currenteiner
touch. Funktion kann im Speicher verbleiben. Wenn die
Derpop-up
zuletzt
Wert
Press the TOUCH button again, the cursor goes to the next touch and the selected touch is set.
Hold“
aktiviert
ist, bleibt
das
dauerhaft stehen und kehrt
InsteadFunktion
of the TOUCH„Display
button, the setting
value
can be changed
by the DATA
UPPop-Up-Display
and DOWN buttons
Backing
Up adjusted
value. The last
adjusted
value of each Function
can be retained in memory.
nicht
automatisch
zum
Hauptmenü
zurück.
If the DISPLAY HOLD is on, the pop-up display does not return to the main menu and the LCD screen shows the current pop-up
display.
DISPLAY
Display
SOFT
1
SOFT 2
Soft
SOFT
3 1
These settings let you produce a relatively loud sound even when playing
the key softly.
NORMAL 1
Soft 32
NORMAL
NORMAL 3
These settings are standard
keyboard
is usedanschlagen.
as
Sound,
auchresponse
wenn and
Siethe
dieNORMAL
Tasten2sanft
the basic setting.
HARD
1
Normal
2
HARD
2
Normal 3
HARD 3
These settings require you
to play the keys quite
strongly
to produce
maximum2“ ist daher auch
Anschlagsstärke
eines
Klaviers.
„Normal
loudness.
Soft 2
Normal 1
Hard 1
FIXED
VELOCITY
Hard
2
Mit diesen Einstellung produzieren Sie einen relativ lauten
Diese Einstellungen entsprechen der üblichen
die Grundeinstellung.
These settings produce
sameEinstellungen
degree of loudness,
no matter
howTasten kräftig
Bei the
diesen
müssen
Sie die
strongly or softly you play the keys.
Hard 3
anschlagen um einen lauten Sound zu erzeugen.
Hier ist die Anschlagssensitivität abgeschaltet. Alle Töne
Adjusting the fixed touch level.
Fixedthe
Velocity
sind gleich laut, egal wie fest oder leicht Sie die Tasten
This determines
level of the fixed velocity touch.
anschlagen.
Press and hold down the SETUP/KEYPAD button and press the TOUCH button until the cursor goes
to the 'Fixed Velocity' option.
Press the ENTER button to move the cursor on the velocity level (default 080).
Adjust the
velocity level
by using
the DATA
UP andVelocity
DOWN buttons.
Einstellen
des
Levels
für Fixed
Whenever press both the DATA UP and DOWN buttons, default value of the selected voice part is set automatically.
Press and hold the DATA UP or DOWN button for continuous decrementing or incrementing.
Halten Sie SETUP(KEYPAD gedrückt und drücken Sie zusätzlich TOUCH bis der Corsor
Backing Up adjusted value. The last adjusted value of each Function can be retained in memory.
If the DISPLAY
HOLD
is on, the„Fixed
pop-up display
does not return
to the
main menu and
LCD screen shows
current
pop-up zu verändern.
bei der
Option
Velocity“
steht.
Drücken
SietheENTER
um the
den
Cursor
display.
Ab Werk steht der Level bei 080. Sie können den Parameter auch mit den Tasten DATA +/einstellen.
Wenn Sie die Tasten gleichzeitig drücken, wird die Werkseinstellung wiederhergestellt. Der
zuletzt eingestellte Wert verbleibt31im Speicher. Wenn die Funktion „Display Hold“ aktiviert
ist, bleibt das Pop-Up-Display dauerhaft stehen und kehrt nicht automatisch zum
Hauptmenü zurück.
Begleitautomatik
Das Piano spielt automatisch Bass und Begleitung in Übereinstimmung mit den Akkorden,
die Sie spielen. Die Sounds und Voices sind abhängig von dem Rhythmus, den Sie
gewählt haben, so dass Sie stets eine vollständige und realistische Begleitung zu Ihren
Auto
Accompaniment
Auto
Accompaniment
Auto Accompaniment
Auto Accompaniment
Auto
AutoAccompaniment
Accompaniment
Melodienoten
bekommen, die Sie mit der rechten Hand spielen. Auf diese Weise entsteht
keyboard
automatically
plays bass
and
parts
accordance
with the chords you finger. The bass
der Eindruck
eines
is keyboard automatically
playsThis
bass
and1-Mann-Ensembles.
chord
parts in accordance
with
thechord
chords
youinfinger.
The bass
This keyboard automatically plays bass and chord parts in accordance with the chords you finger. The bass
chord
parts
arethat
played
sounds and
voicestothat
arethe
automatically
selected to select the rhythm
d chord parts are played usingand
sounds
and
voices
are using
automatically
selected
select
rhythm
and chord parts are played using sounds and voices that are automatically selected to select the rhythm
youyou
areget
using.
of thisaccompaniments
means that you get
realistic notes
accompaniments
u are using. All of this means that
full,All
realistic
for full,
the melody
you play for the melody notes you play
you are using. All of this means that you get full, realistic accompaniments for the melody notes you play
your
hand, creating
the mood of a one-person ensemble.
th your right hand, creating the with
mood
of aright
one-person
ensemble.
with your right hand, creating the mood of a one-person ensemble.
Auswahl
des
RhythmusA RHYTHM
SELECTING
ELECTING
AARHYTHM
SELECTING
RHYTHM
This piano
provides
withselect
80 exciting
rhythms
that you
can select using the following procedure.
s piano provides you with 80 exciting
rhythms
that you can
using the
following
procedure.
This piano provides you with 80 exciting rhythms that you can select using the following procedure.
Das Piano stellt Ihnen 80 eindrucksvolle Rhythmen zur Verfügung, aus denen Sie wählen
können. HaltenCall
Sieup
den
SETUP/KEYPAD;
theKnopf
SETUP/KEYPAD
mode. das Pop-Up-Fenster erscheint im
Call
upup
the
SETUP/KEYPAD
mode.
Call
the
SETUP/KEYPAD
mode.
Display.
Press and hold
down
SETUP/KEYPAD
button.
pop-up appears in the LCD screen.
ss and hold down the SETUP/KEYPAD
button.
Thethe
setup
pop-up appears
in theThe
LCDsetup
screen.
Press and hold down the SETUP/KEYPAD button. The setup pop-up appears in the LCD screen.
Drücken
Sie die
Taste(n)
für die Rhythm.
Rhythmus-Nummer und drücken Sie die Taste ENTER.
Select
the
desired
Rhythm.
Select
the desired
Select
the
desired
Rhythm.
ss thethe
RHYTHM
NUMBER
key(s)
and
ENTER
key.
Also,
you
can
use
UP(+)
and
DOWN(-)
keys
Press
the
RHYTHM
NUMBER
key(s)
and
ENTER
key.
Also, you
can
use UP(+) and
DOWN(-)
Anstelle
der
Nummerntasten
können
Sie
auch
die
Tasten
+/-keys
verwenden.
Wenn
Siekeys
diese
Press
RHYTHM
NUMBER
key(s)
and
ENTER
key.
Also,
you
can
use
UP(+)
and
DOWN(-)
tead
of
the
Number
keys.
instead
of
the
Number
keys.
nstead of the Number keys.
Tasten gleichzeitig drücken, wird die Grundeinstellung (Rhythm Pop 1, Nr. 00) ausgewählt.
zu
Whatever you select a rhythm number, you
shouldyou
press
the ENTER
keynumber,
(not button)
for selecting
rhythm.
Whatever
select
a rhythm
you should
press the
ENTER key (not button) for selecting rhythm.
Whatever you select
akönnen
rhythm number,
you
should press
the
ENTER
key (not button)
for selecting
rhythm.
Sieand
die
Tasten
+/auch
gedrückt
halten
um
schneller
Nummer
you press both UP(+)
DOWN(-) Keys
atyou
the
sameboth
time
automatically
return Keys
to theatdefault
Rhythm
Pop1
( 00). returnzur
If
press
UP(+)
and
DOWN(-)
the
same
time
automatically
to thegewünschten
default Rhythm Pop1 ( 00).
If you press both UP(+) and DOWN(-) Keys at the same time automatically return to the default Rhythm Pop1 ( 00).
Hold the UP(+)(or DOWN(-)
Keys for continuous
decrementing
or incrementing.
Hold
the
UP(+)(or
DOWN(-)
Keys
for
continuous
decrementing
or
incrementing.
gelangen.
Hold the UP(+)(or DOWN(-) Keys for continuous decrementing or incrementing.
Beispiel
Sie möchten „Makarena“ (nr. 80)
auswählen. Halten Sie den Knopf
GM VOICE gedrückt. Drücken Sie
XAMPLE
EXAMPLE
EXAMPLE
uyou
want
to
choose
MAKARENA
(No.
80),
If
you
want
choose
80),
8to(A),
0 MAKARENA
(C#) und(No.ENTER
(C). Im
want to choose MAKARENA (No. 80),
Press
andand
hold
down
thethe
GMGM
VOICE
button.
1)button.
Press and hold down the GM VOICE button.
1) Press
hold
down
VOICE
Display
erscheint
80 und das Piano klingt mit dem
Press
number
8 (A),
0(C#)
andand
Enter(C)
key.
2)
Press
2) Press
number
8 (A),
0(C#)
Enter(C)
key. number 8 (A), 0(C#) and Enter(C) key.
no
shows
80
in
the
the
pop
up
display
and
makes
bell
sound.
Piano
shows
80bell
in
the
the pop up display
and makes
Sound
„Bell“.
Das
Pop-Up-Fenster
kehrt
nachbell3 sound.
iano shows 80 in the the pop up display and makes
sound.
POP-UP
Display
POP-UP
Display
Sekunden
zum
Hauptmenü
zurück, es sei denn, Sie
POP-UP Display
pop-up
display
returns
to the
previous
display
after
3 seconds.
The
pop-up
display
returns to the previous display after 3 seconds.
he pop-up
display
returns
to the
previous
display
after
3 seconds.
haben
die
Funktion
„Display
Hold“ aktiviert.
the DISPLAY HOLD is on, the pop-up display
not return
If the does
DISPLAY
HOLDto
is on, the pop-up display does not return to
If the DISPLAY HOLD is on, the pop-up display does not return to
main
menu
andand
thethe
LCDLCD
screen
shows
thethe
current
pop-up
main
menu
anddisplay.
thedisplay.
LCD screen shows the current pop-up display.
he main
menu
screen
shows
current
pop-up
Sie können zum Spielmodus zurückkehren, indem
Sie den Knopf SETUP/KEYPAD wieder loslassen.
Return
toto
Play
mode.
Return
Play
mode.
Return to Play mode.
Auto Accompaniment
ease thethe
SETUP/KEYPAD
button.
Release the SETUP/KEYPAD button.
Release
SETUP/KEYPAD
button.
Übersicht über die Rhythmus-Styles
Rhythm Style List
3232
32
TEMPO CONTROL ADJUSTMENT
Whenever you select a different style, the preset tempo for that style is also selected, and the tempo
Einstellen
is
shown in thedes
MultiTempos
Function display after STYLE SELECT Pop-up display. (Unless you try changing
the style during playback, in which case the same tempo is maintained.)
Press
theimmer
TEMPOSie
buttons.
( You
can showStyle
currentauswählen,
tempo in the main
display.)
Wann
einen
anderen
ist automatisch
auch das voreingestellte
Tempo für diesen Style mitgewählt. Das Tempo wird im Pop-Up-Fenster der Style-Auswahl
You can press either TEMPO UP or DOWN button briefly to decrement or increment the tempo value by one, hold the
button for continuous decrementing or incrementing.
Tempo (Range: 40 ~ 250, Default setting: Differs depending on the style.)
MPO CONTROL ADJUSTMENT
never you select a different style, the preset tempo for that style is also selected, and the tempo
own in the Multi Function display after STYLE SELECT Pop-up display. (Unless you try changing
angezeigt.
Wenn
Siesame
dentempo
Styleiswährend
des Playback ändern, wird das Tempo
style during playback,
in which
case the
maintained.)
beibehalten.
Sietempo
die Tempo-Knöpfe.
s the TEMPO buttons.
( You canDrücken
show current
in the main display.)
TEMPO CONTROL
CONTROL ADJUSTMENT
ADJUSTMENT
TEMPO
TEMPO CONTROL ADJUSTMENT
Whenever you
you select
select aa different
different
style,the
the
preset
tempo
forthat
that
style
alsoselected,
selected,
and
thestyle
tempo
Whenever
youpreset
selecttempo
a different
style,
theisispreset
tempo for
that
is also selected, and the tempo
Whenever
style,
for
style
also
and
the
tempo
shown in
in the
the Multi
Multi Function
Function
displayinafter
after
STYLEFunction
SELECTPop-up
Pop-updisplay.
display.
(Unless
youtry
trychanging
changing
is shown
the STYLE
Multi
display
after
STYLE
SELECT
Pop-up
display. (Unless you try changing
isis shown
display
SELECT
(Unless
you
the style
styleduring
duringplayback,
playback,in
inwhich
which
case
thesame
same
tempo
ismaintained.)
maintained.)
the
style
during
playback,
iniswhich
case the same tempo is maintained.)
the
case
the
tempo
Press
the
TEMPO
buttons.
(
You
can
show
current
tempo
in
the
main
display.)
Press
the
TEMPO
buttons.
(
You
can
show
current
tempo
inhold
thethe
main display.)
Press
the
TEMPO
buttons.
(
You
can
show
current
tempo
in
the
main
u can
press
either
TEMPO
UP
or
DOWN
button
briefly
to
decrement
or
increment
thedisplay.)
tempo
value
by one,
Sie können durch einmaliges oder dauerhaftes
Drücken
der
Knöpfe
TEMPO +/- das
n for continuous decrementing or incrementing.
schnell
in einem Bereich von 40 bis 250 verändern. Das
mpo (Range: 40 ~ Tempo
250, Defaultlangsam
setting: Differsoder
depending
on the style.)
storing the Default
Style
Tempo
voreingestellte Tempo ist Style-abhängig. Sie können es aufrufen, indem Sie die Knöpfe
n restore the preset tempo for the selected Style at anytime by simultaneously pressing both TEMPO UP and DOWN buttons.
TEMPO
undis changed,
- gleichzeitig
drücken.
en the performance
screen or a+value
the tempo may
go slow . Wenn der Performance-Bildschirm oder ein Wert
verändert wird, kann sich das Tempo verlangsamen.
can press
either
TEMPO
UP or DOWN
button the
briefly
to decrement
or increment
You can
can press
press either
either TEMPO
TEMPO UP
UP or
orYou
DOWN
button
briefly
todecrement
decrement
orincrement
increment
thetempo
tempo
valueby
byone,
one,
holdthe
the the tempo value by one, hold the
You
DOWN
button
briefly
to
or
value
hold
button
for continuous decrementing or incrementing.
buttonfor
forcontinuous
continuousdecrementing
decrementing
orincrementing.
incrementing.
button
or
Tempo
(Range:
40 ~ 250,on
Default
setting: Differs depending on the style.)
Tempo(Range:
(Range:40
40~~250,
250,Default
Defaultsetting:
setting:
Differs
depending
on
thestyle.)
style.)
Tempo
Differs
depending
the
Restoring the Default Style Tempo
Restoring
theDefault
DefaultStyle
StyleTempo
Tempo
all up
the SETUP/KEYPAD
mode.
Restoring
the
You
can restore
preset
tempo
for the selected
Style at
anytime
by UP
simultaneously
pressing
Youcan
canrestore
restore
thethe
preset
tempofor
forthe
the
selected
Stylethe
anytime
bysimultaneously
simultaneously
pressing
both
TEMPO
UPand
andDOWN
DOWNbuttons.
buttons.both TEMPO UP and DOWN buttons.
You
the
preset
tempo
selected
Style
atatanytime
by
pressing
both
TEMPO
s and
hold
down
SETUP/KEYPAD
button.
The
setup
pop-up
appears
in
the
LCD
screen.
When
performance
screen
or go
ago
value
Whenthe
theperformance
performancescreen
screenor
oraavalue
valueisthe
ischanged,
changed,
thetempo
tempo
may
slowis
When
the
may
slow
. . changed, the tempo may go slow .
COMPANIMENT VOLUME ADJUSTMENT
Lautstärke der Begleitautomatik
ACCOMPANIMENT
VOLUME
ADJUSTMENT
ACCOMPANIMENT
VOLUME
ADJUSTMENT
ACCOMPANIMENT
VOLUME
ADJUSTMENT
Halten Sie den
Knopf SETUP/KEYPAD
gedrückt;
das Pop-Up-Fenster erscheint im
Callmode.
up the SETUP/KEYPAD mode.
Call up
upDisplay.
theSETUP/KEYPAD
SETUP/KEYPAD
mode.
Call
the
Press and holdbutton.
down The
the
button.
setup
pop-up appears in the LCD screen.
Press and
andhold
holddown
downthe
theSETUP/KEYPAD
SETUP/KEYPAD
button.
TheSETUP/KEYPAD
setuppop-up
pop-upappears
appears
inThe
theLCD
LCDscreen.
screen.
Press
setup
in
the
djust the accompaniment volume.
st the Accompaniment Volume by using the ACCOMP VOLUME UP and DOWN keys .
Adjust
the accompaniment volume.
Adjust the
theaccompaniment
accompaniment
volume.
Adjust
volume.
Adjust the
Accompaniment
Volume
by using
theDOWN
ACCOMP
VOLUME
UP and DOWN keys .
Adjustthe
theAccompaniment
AccompanimentVolume
Volume
byusing
using
the
ACCOMP
VOLUME
UPand
and
DOWN
keys
Adjust
by
ACCOMP
VOLUME
UP
keys
..
Siethe
können
über
die
Tasten
ACCOMP
ou press both VOLUME UP and DOWN Keys at the same time automatically return
VOLUME +/- die Lautstärke anpassen. Wenn
default accompaniment volume(85).
e range of volume is 0 ~ 100.
Sie die Tasten ACCOMP VOLUME + und d the button for continuous decrementing or incrementing.
gleichzeitig drücken, wird die Grundeinstellung
available to adjust each part volume of accompaniment independently.
the ENTER button in the accomp pop-up display.
(85)wieder aufgerufen. Der einstellbare
ursor moves on each part(or all parts) of the accompaniment. When pressing accomp
e up orIf down
key, only
selectedUP
partand
volume
adjusted.
Bereich
geht
0Keys
bis
If
youis press
VOLUME
UPautomatically
andvon
DOWN
at100.
the same time automatically return
youpress
press
boththe
VOLUME
DOWN
Keysboth
at
the
sametime
time
automatically
return
If you
both
VOLUME
UP and
DOWN
Keys
at
the
same
return
to the default accompaniment volume(85).
tothe
thedefault
defaultaccompaniment
accompanimentvolume(85).
volume(85).
to
The range of volume is 0 ~ 100.
Therange
rangeof
ofvolume
volumeisis 00~~100.
100.
The
Hold
the button
forden
continuous
decrementing Begleitinstrumenten
or incrementing.
Sie
können
die
Lautstärke
verschieden
33
Hold
the
button
for
continuous
decrementing
orincrementing.
incrementing.
Hold the button for continuous decrementing
or
It's
available to adjust
each part volume of accompaniment independently.
It'savailable
availableto
togesondert
adjusteach
eachpart
partvolume
volume
of
accompaniment
independently.
It's
adjust
of
accompaniment
independently.
zuweisen,
indem
Sie
im
Pop-Up-Fenster
ENTER drücken
Press
the ENTER
button in the accomp pop-up display.
Pressthe
theENTER
ENTERbutton
buttonin
inthe
theaccomp
accomp
pop-up
display.
Press
pop-up
display.
The
cursor
moves
on
each
part(or
all
parts)
of
the
accompaniment.
pressing accomp
bis
zum
entsprechenden
Parameter
gelangen.
Die When
Einstellung
The cursor
cursor moves
moves
onSie
eachpart(or
part(orall
all
parts)of
ofthe
theaccompaniment.
accompaniment.
Whenpressing
pressing
accomp
The
on
each
parts)
When
accomp
volume
up
or
down
key,
only
the
selected
part
volume
is
adjusted.
volumeup
upor
ordown
down
key,only
onlythe
theselected
selected
partvolume
volume
adjusted.
volume
key,
isisadjusted.
funktioniert
wie part
oben
beschrieben.
33
33
33
Spielen mit Begleitautomatik
Es gibt verschiedene Möglichkeiten, die Begleitautomatik zu starten
Direkter Start
Drücken Sie START/STOP; die Kontrolllampe blinkt und der Rhythmus beginnt. Jeder
Style hat zwei Hauptloops. Die Lampe des gegenwärtig ausgewählten Pattern leuchtet.
Der „Main Loop 1“ (Fill 1) ist das Grundpattern des Styles und der „Main Loop 2“ (Fill 2) ist
eine Variation davon. Überlegtes Umschalten zwischen den beiden Pattern kann den Song
variieren und interessanter machen. Wen Fill 1 abgelaufen ist, wird automatisch der Main
Loop 1 abgespielt, auf Fill 2 startet die Variation.
has two main loops. The lamp of the currently selected pattern lights.
basic pattern of the style and Main loop2(FILL2) is a variation of Main loop 1.
etween FILL 1 and FILL 2 patterns within a song can add variety and make the overall
ng.
the main loop 1 plays and after the Fill 2, the main loop2(variation) always starts.
art
start the style by playing a note or chord on the keyboard.
FILL1/SYNCH or Fill2/SYNC button.
Synchronisierter
Start
mp flashes in time
with selected tempo,
indicating that Synchronized Start is in
Bei dieser Methode startet die Begleitautomatik mit dem ersten Akkord oder der ersten
t keyboard(leftNote,
hand),die
the rhythm
starts. Wenn Sie das möchten, drücken Sie entweder FILL1/SYNC oder
Sie spielen.
FILL2/SYNC.
Start/Stop-Lampe
blinkt
im ausgewählten
Tempo und zeigt damit an,
d Start, press the
FILL1/SYNCH orDie
Fill2/SYNC
button again so the
lamp turns
off.
dass die Begleitung für den Start bereit ist. Spielen Sie nun eine Taste mit der linken Hand
und der Rhythmus beginnt. Um den Synchron-Start abzuschalten, drücken Sie erneut
FILL1/SYNC oder FILL2/SYNC, so dass die Kontrollleuchte erlischt.
OR
roduction
/END button, then the START/STOP button. The style starts with Intro pattern. After
Main loop 1 or 2 starts.
off when the pattern changes from Intro to Main Loop.
e by using the FILL/SYNC button. (see above synchronized start.)
Starten mit Intro
Drücken Sie zuerst den Knopf INTRO/END, dann den Knopf START/STOP. Der Style wird
companiment
mitstyle
einem Intro gestartet. Danach startet Main Loop 1 oder 2. Die Intro-Kontolllampe
erlischt, sobald
k, press the START/STOP
button. das Intro beendet ist und der Main Loop beginnt.
pattern beforeSie
stopping,
press the
INTRO/END
button
playback
of rhythm. starten (siehe oben).
können
den
Style mit
demduring
Knopf
FILL/SYNC
amp flashes during playback of ending.
ending playback, press the FILL 1 or the FILL 2 button. The ending pattern stops
arts after fill pattern playback.
Stoppen der Begleitung
Um das Playback zu stoppen, drücken Sie den START/STOP-Knopf. Wenn Sie zuvor
ent
noch ein Ending einfügen möchten, drücken Sie INTRO/END, während der Rhythmus
spielt. Während das Ending gespielt wird, blinkt die entsprechende Kontrolllampe. Wenn
34
TO ACCOMPANIMENT
Sie das Playback doch nicht beenden möchten, drücken Sie FILL1 oder FILL2. Das
wird
nachAccompaniment
einem Fill Infeature.
wiederBefore
in den Main Loop übergeleitet.
ure describes Ending
how to use
thedaraufhin
keyboard's Auto
irst select the rhythm you want to use and set the tempo of the rhythm to the
m style.
Benutzen der Begleitautomatik
1. Wählen Sie einen Rythmus-Style (siehe „Auswahl des Rythmus“).
2. Stellen Sie das gewünschte Tempo ein (siehe „Einstellen des Tempos“).
o. (see the TEMPO
CONTROLSie
ADJUSTMENT
section on page
33) Begleitautomatik-Funktion einzuschalten. Die
3. Drücken
AUTO ACCOMP
um die
leuchtet auf. Wenn Sie den Knopf abermals drücken, wird die Funktion
ccompanimentKontrolllampe
function to ON.
AUTO ACCOMP button.
The
lamp
lights.
wieder abgeschaltet, die Lampe erlischt.
thm. (see the SELECTING A RHYTHM section on page 32)
OMP button again to turn off the lamp and set Auto Accompaniment to off.
ACCOMPANIMENT MODE
UP/KEYPAD mode.
the SETUP/KEYPAD button. The setup pop-up appears in the LCD screen.
Call up the SETUP/KEYPAD mode.
Press and hold down the SETUP/KEYPAD button. The setup pop-up appears in the LCD screen.
Press one of the AUTO ACCOMP MODE keys.
Einstellen des Begleit-Modus
oneSie
of the
ACCOMP
MODE keys.
4.Press
Halten
denAUTO
Knopf
SETUP/KEYPAD
gedrückt; das Pop-Up-Fenster erscheint im
Display.
FINGERED KEYBOARD (default)
Wählen
Sie einen Begleit-Modus
Instead of above5.
way
to set auto-accompaniment
mode, the mode cab aus. Ab Werk ist „Fingered“
e changed by using the
DATA
UP
and
DOWN
button.
eingestellt. Sie können auch die Knöpfe DATA +/- verwenden
ess the AUTO-ACCOMP button to turn on the auto-accompaniment.
zwischen
den
Modi
zu wechseln.
he auto-accomp lampum
is turned
on and the
LCD
screen shows
the auto
FINGERED
KEYBOARD
(default)
ccompaniment mode pop-up display.
Instead of above way to set auto-accompaniment mode, the mode cab
Auto Accompaniment
this pop-up display, you can change the auto-accompaniment
by UP and DOWN button.
be changed by usingmode
the DATA
sing the DATA UP6.
andUm
DOWN
button.
die
Begleitautomatik
zu starten,
Sie START/STOP
Press the AUTO-ACCOMP
button todrücken
turn on the auto-accompaniment.
The auto-accomp
lamp is turned on
and the
LCD screen
the an
autozu
oder FILL1/SYNC
oder FILL2/SYNC
und
fangen
Sieshows
dann
accompaniment mode pop-up display.
spielen.
In this pop-up display, you can change the auto-accompaniment mode by
using the DATA UP and DOWN button.
START THE AUTO ACCOMPANIMENT
To start Auto accompaniment, press the START/STOP button. Alternately, press the FILL1/SYNC or
FILL1/SYNC button, then play the keyboard.
35
Die verschiedenen Begleit-Modi
TYPES OF AUTO ACCOMPANIMENT MODE
START
THE
AUTO
Single
Finger
Single
Finger
START
THEACCOMPANIMENT
AUTO ACCOMPANIMENT
35
Auto Accompaniment
Auto Accompaniment
Auto Accompaniment
The
Single
Finger
method
makes
it easy
toSTART/STOP
produce
accompaniment
using
major,
minor,
seventh and
To
start
Auto
accompaniment,
the
button. Alternately,
press
the
FILL1/SYNC
or
Diese
Methode
macht
espress
einfach,
einethe
Begleitung
mit
Dur-,
Moll-,
SeptimeMoll or
Auto
Accompaniment
To
start Auto
accompaniment,
press
START/STOP
button.
Alternately,
press theund
FILL1/SYNC
START
THE
AUTO
ACCOMPANIMENT
minor
seventh
chords
by
pressing
certain
key
(according
to
simple
rules)
in
the
left
range
of
the
keyboard
FILL1/SYNC
button,
then
play
the
keyboard.
Septime-Akkorden
zu produzieren,
indem Sie bestimmte einzelne Tasten (entsprechend
FILL1/SYNC button,
then play the keyboard.
(lower thanTo
splitstart
point).
(seeaccompaniment,
SINGLE FINGER
section
page 36) button. Alternately, press the FILL1/SYNC or
Auto
press
the on
einfachen
Regeln)
inthe
der
linken
Hälfte
derSTART/STOP
Tastatur
(unterhalb des Split Points)
FILL1/SYNC
button,
then
play
the
keyboard.
START
THE AUTO ACCOMPANIMENT
Fingered
anschlagen.
TYPES
OF
AUTO
ACCOMPANIMENT
MODE
TYPES
OF
AUTO
MODE
Thestart
Fingered
method
lets
you produce
accompaniment
by playing
fullthe
chords
in the left
To
Auto
accompaniment,
pressACCOMPANIMENT
theautomatic
START/STOP
button. Alternately,
press
FILL1/SYNC
or
range
of
the
keyboard
(lower
than
split
point).
(see
the
FINGERED
section
on
page
37)
FILL1/SYNC
button,
then
play
the
keyboard.
Single
Finger
Single Finger
Fingered
TYPES
OF AUTO ACCOMPANIMENT MODE
The
Single
Finger
method
makes
it easy
to produce
accompaniment
usingSie
major,
minor,Akkorde
seventh
and
The
Single
Finger
method
makes
it easy
to produce accompaniment
using
major,
minor,
and
BeiFull
dieser
Methode
erzeugen
Sie
die
Begleitung,
indem
ganze
aufseventh
der linken
Keyboard
Single
Finger
minor
seventh
chords
by
pressing
certain
key
(according
to
simple
rules)
in
the
left
range
of
the
keyboard
minor
seventh
chords
by
pressing
certain
key
(according
to
simple
rules)
in
the
left
range
of
the
keyboard
Full
keyboard
automatically
produces
appropriate
automatic
accompaniment
forusing
virtually
anything
Seite
derThe
Tastatur
(unterhalb
Split
Points)
spielen.
Single Finger
method des
makes
it easy
to produce
accompaniment
major,
minor, seventh and
(lower
than (see
split
point).
(see FINGER
the
SINGLE
FINGER
section
pageon
36)page 38)
TYPES
OF
AUTO
ACCOMPANIMENT
MODE
(lower
than
split
point).
the
SINGLE
section
on
page
36) on
you play
on
the
keyboard,
in
any
range.
(see
the
FULL
KEYBOARD
section
minor seventh chords by pressing certain key (according to simple rules) in the left range of the keyboard
Fingered
(lower
than split point). (see the SINGLE FINGER section on page 36)
Single
Finger
Fingered
Full Keyboard
Single
Finger
The
Fingered
you
produce
automatic accompaniment
by
playing
full
chords
left
The
Single
Finger
method
makes
itlets
easy
to
produceaccompaniment
accompaniment
using
major,
minor,
seventh
and
Fingered
method
letsmethod
you produce
automatic
by
playing
full
chords
infür
thepraktisch
left in the
Beiplay
dieser
Methode
wird
die
Begleitung
automatisch
passend
alles,
Fingered
To
Autorange
Accompaniment
to the
selected
style,
press
one, (see
two, three
or
four keyssection
inerzeugt,
the left
range(below
of
the
keyboard
(lower
than
split
point).
the
FINGERED
on
page
37)
minor
seventh
chords
by
pressing
certain
keyproduce
(according
to simple accompaniment
rules)
in the
range
of the keyboard
range
of theThe
keyboard
(lower
than
splityou
point).
(see the
FINGERED
section
onleft
page
37)playing
method
lets
automatic
by
full chords in the left
wasincluding
Sie
auf
der
spielen.
and
theFingered
split Tastatur
point),
following
the rules
described
below.
(lower thanrange
split
point).
(see
the
SINGLE
FINGER
section
on
page
36)
Full
Keyboard
of
the
keyboard
(lower
than
split
point).
(see
the
FINGERED
section
on
page
37)
Full Keyboard
Full
keyboard
automatically
produces
appropriate
automatic
accompaniment
for
virtually anything
Fingered
Full
keyboardFull
automatically
automatic accompaniment for virtually anything
CHORD
EXAMPLE
Keyboardproduces appropriate
you
play
on
the
keyboard,
in
any
range.
(see
the
FULL
KEYBOARD
section
on
page
38)
The
Fingered
method
letsautomatically
automatic
accompaniment
by playing
full38)
chords infor
thevirtually
left
you
play
onFull
the
keyboard,
inyou
anyproduce
range. (see
the FULL
KEYBOARD section
onaccompaniment
page
keyboard
produces
appropriate
anything
MAJOR
Play
C FINGEREDautomatic
range
of
the
keyboard
(lower
than
split
point).
(see
the
section
on
page
37)
you
play
on
the
keyboard,
in
any
range.
(see
the
FULL
KEYBOARD
section
on
page
38)
Single
Finger-Modus
Single
Pressing
just oneFinger
key produces a full Hear a C major
Single
Finger
To
play
Auto Accompaniment
to the selected style, press one, two, three or four keys in the left range(below
Full
Keyboard
major
chord
corresponding
that
note.
chord
To play Autoand
Accompaniment
totothe
selected
style,
press
one,described
two, threebelow.
or four keys in the left range(below
Single
Finger
including
the
split
point),
following
theautomatic
rules
Full
keyboard
automatically
produces
appropriate
accompaniment
and including
the
split
point),
following
the
rules
described
below.press
To
play
Auto
Accompaniment
to
the
selected
style,
one,
two, threefor
orvirtually
four keysanything
in the left range(below
Akkord
you
play onand
theincluding
keyboard,the
in split
any range.
(see the Beispiel
FULL
KEYBOARD
section
point), following
the rules
described
below.on page 38)
CHORD
Play
Cm EXAMPLE
MINOR
CHORD
EXAMPLE
Dur
Single
Finger
MAJOR
Play
a C minor
Simultaneously
pressing any key to the Hear
CHORD
EXAMPLE
Spielen
Sie Cein C,
MAJOR
Taste
erzeugt
ToSpielen
play Auto einer
Accompaniment
to the
selected
style,
press
one,
two,
three
or four keys in the left range(below
Play
C
Pressing
just
one
key
produces
a
full
Hear
a C major
right of that
note results in a full minor chord
sie hören
einen
MAJOR
Play
C C-Durand
including
the one
split
point),
following
the
rules
described
below.
Pressing
just
key corresponding
produces
a full
einen
vollen
Dur-Akkord,
der
zu
Hear
a
C
major
major
chord
to
that
note.
chord.
Pressing
just one key producesAkkord.
a full chord
Hear a C major
major chord
corresponding
dieser
Note
passt. to that note. chord
major
chord
corresponding
to
that
note.
CHORD
EXAMPLE chord
SEVENTH
Play C7 Play Cm
MINOR
MAJOR
Moll
C
Similarly,
pressing one more key to the Play
Play
Hear
a C 7thHear
chord
a C minor
MINOR
Simultaneously
pressing
any key
to Cm
the
Pressing
just
one
key
produces
a
full
Wenn
Sie
zu
der
ersten
Taste
Spielen
Sie ein
Play
Cm Cm,
MINOR
Hear
aa C
major
right
(three
keys
in
all)
produces
a
full
Hear
C
minor
Simultaneously
pressing
any
key
the
right
of that note
results
in a full minor chord
major
chord
corresponding
to
that to
note.
Hear
a C minor
Simultaneously
pressing
any key
to the
eine
weitere
rechts
davon
sie
hören
einen
C-Mollchord
7th
chord.
rightchord.
of that
note results in a full minor chord
chord
right
of
that
note
results
in
a
full
minor
spielen, erzeugen Sie damit
Akkord.
chord.
chord.
einen
Moll-Akkord.
SEVENTH
MINOR SEVENTH
Cm7 Play C7
Play Cm
MINOR
Similarly,
pressing
one more
key to the Hear7th
SEVENTH
Pressing
a
fourth
key
to
the
right
(four
a C 7th chord
Hear
a C minor
SEVENTH
Simultaneously
pressing any key to the Play C7
Play C7
right
(three
keys
in
all)
produces
a
full
Similarly,
pressing
one
more
key
to
the
keys in
creates
a pressing
full minor
seventh
chord
Similarly,
one
more key
to the
right
of all)
that
note results
in a full
minor
Hear
a C 7thHear
chord
a C 7th chord
7th
chord.
right
(three
keys
in
all)
produces
a
full
chord.
right
(three
keys
in
all)
produces
a
full
chord.
7th chord. 7th chord.
Play Cm7
SEVENTH MINOR SEVENTH
Play C7
Hear a C minor 7th
Pressing
a
fourth
key
to
the
right
(four
Similarly,
pressing
one more key to the Hear
MINOR SEVENTH
Play Cm7
MINOR SEVENTH
Play
Cm7
a
C
7th
chord
keys in all) creates a full minor seventh chord
Pressing just one key produces a full
Pressing just one key produces a full
major chord corresponding to that note.
major chord corresponding to that note.
Hear a C major
Hear a C major
chord
chord
Play Cm
MINOR
Play Cm
MINOR
Simultaneously pressing any key to the Hear a C minor
pressing any key to the Hear a C minor
Akkord Simultaneously
right of that note results in a full Beispiel
minor chord
right of that note results in a full minor chord
chord.
Septimechord.
SEVENTH
Wen SieSEVENTH
nun noch eine weitere
Spielen Play
Sie C7
ein C7,
Play
C7 C7Similarly,
pressing
one more key sie
to the
Taste rechts
davon
dazunehmen
hören
einen
Hear a C 7th chord
Similarly, pressing one more key to the Hear
a C 7th chord
right
(three keyserzeugen
in all) producesAkkord.
a full
(3 Tastenright
insgesamt)
(three keys in all) produces a full
7th
chord.
Sie einen7th
Septimeptakkord.
chord.
Moll Septime
MINOR SEVENTH
Play Cm7
MINOR SEVENTH
Spielen Play
Sie Cm7
ein Cm7,
Pressing
fourth rechts
key to the
right (four Hear a C minor 7th
Mit einerPressing
viertenaaTaste
von
Hear
a C minor
7th
fourth key to the rightsie
(four
hören
einen
C-Moll7keys inerzeugen
all) createsSie
a full
minor seventh chord
den anderen
einen
keys in all) creates a full minor seventh
Akkord. chord
chord.
Moll Septime-Akkord.
chord.
Auto Accompaniment
36
36
Fingered-Modus
Fingered
Dieser
Modus
Ihnen,
ein komplettes
zu spielen,
Allows you
to playerlaubt
a complete
style arrangement
when Style-Arrangement
you play three or four fingered
chords wenn
in the Sie drei
left
range
of
the
keyboard
split.
oder vier Akkorde in der linken Hälfte der Tastatur (unterhalb des Split Points) spielen.
Major: C
Minor: Cm
Dominant 7: C7
Minor 7th: Cm7
Major 7th: CM 7
Augmented: Caug
Diminished: Cdim
Suspended 4: Csus4
Dominant Diminished:C7dim
Dominant Augmented:C7aug
Dominant 7th 5: C7-5
Suspended 2: Csus2
Major 7th Augmented:CM7aug
6th: C6
Minor 6th: Cm6
Add 9th : C9
Minor 7 5: Cm7-5
Minor Major 7th: CmM7
5th: C 5
Minor Add 9th: Cm9
Dominant Sus4: C7sus4
Minor Major 7th 5: CmM7-5
Full Keyboard-Modus
Wenn Sie diesen Modus auswählen, kreiert das Piano automatisch die passende
Begleitung, während Sie beidhändig nach Belieben auf der Tastatur spielen können. Der
Name des Akkords, den das Piano erkannt hat, erscheint im Display. Obwohl dieser
Auto Accompaniment
Modus mit sehr vielen Songs funktioniert, kann es doch vorkommen,
dass einige
Auto Accompaniment
Arrangements weniger für diese Funktion geeignet sind.
Full Keyboard
Full
Keyboard
When the Full Keyboard mode is selected, the piano will automatically creates appropriate accompaniment
When
Keyboard
is selected,
the piano
automatically
appropriate accompaniment
Stoppen
der
while the
youFull
play
justBegleitautomatik
aboutmode
anything
using both
hands,will
anywhere
on thecreates
keyboard.
while
you play
justtoabout
using both
anywhere on
the keyboard.
You don
t have
worryanything
about specifying
thehands,
accompaniment
chords.
The name of the detected chord will
You
don int have
to worry
about specifying
the accompaniment
Themany
namesongs,
of the some
detected
chord will
appear
the display.
(Although
Full keyboard
is designed to chords.
work with
arrangements
Drücken
START/STOP
oder
INTRO/END
zu stoppen. Sie
appear
inbe
theSie
display.
(Although
Full feature.)
keyboard
is designed toum
workdie
withBegleitautomatik
many songs, some arrangements
may not
suitable
for
use with this
können
auch
ausschalten,
indem Sie den Knopf AUTO ACC drücken; die
may
not besie
suitable
for use
with this feature.)
Kontrollleuchte erlischt dann.
STOPPING THE AUTO ACCOMPANIMENT
STOPPING
THE AUTO ACCOMPANIMENT
Press the START/STOP button or the INTRO/ENDING button to stop the Auto Accompaniment. You
can also
turn off the Auto
Accompaniment
by pressing
the AUTO
(the lamp turns
Press
the START/STOP
button
or the INTRO/ENDING
button
to stopACCOMP
the Autobutton
Accompaniment.
You
off).also turn off the Auto Accompaniment by pressing the AUTO ACCOMP button (the lamp turns
can
off).
Ändern des Split Points
OR
OR
Für die Begleitautomatik können Sie die Tastatur an einem beliebigen Punkt, dem Split
Point, in einen rechten und einen linken Bereich teilen. Um einen Split Point zuzuweisen,
CHANGING
SPLIT
POINT
halten
Sie denTHE
Knopf
SPLIT
gedrückt und betätigen Sie die Taste, an der Sie die Tastatur
CHANGING
THE
SPLIT
POINT
Right
range
and
left
range
for
Auto
Accompaniment
can bei
be divided
teilen möchten. Ab Werk liegt der Split Point
F#4. at any keys.
To assign
down
the SPLIT button
press a key.
(Default
Right
rangenew
andsplit
left point,
range hold
for Auto
Accompaniment
canand
be divided
at any
keys. F#4)
To assign new split point, hold down the SPLIT button and press a key. (Default F#4)
Wenn einer der Modi Single Finger oder Fingered gewählt ist, ist die Tastatur automatisch
SPLIT POINT
in
einen
linken
rechten
Bereich
geteilt,isda
Sie in diesen
im linken
When
Single
Finger und
or Fingered
is selected
the keyboard
automatically
dividedModi
into leftdie
andAkkorde
right sections.
SPLIT
POINT
Bereich,
die
dagegen
im
spielen
You must
use
theMelodie
left
to play
the chords
and the right
sectionmüssen.
to play
the melody.
When
Single
Finger
orsection
Fingered
is selected
therechten
keyboard
is automatically
divided
into left and right sections.
SPLIT
(F#4)
You must use the left section to play the chords
andPOINT
the right
section to play the melody.
SPLIT POINT (F#4)
38
38
Aufnahme
Recording
Das Piano verfügt über eine umfassende Aufnahmefunktion, die es Ihnen erlaubt, Ihr Spiel
aufzunehmen
Recordingund auf einer SD-karte zu speichern.
Recording
The piano features comprehensive song recording functions that allow you to record your own
Recording
performance. Also your recorded song can be stored into an SD memory card.
Aufnehmen eines Songs
Recording
RECORDINGsong
A SONG
The piano features
comprehensive
recording functions that allow you to record your own
1. Wählen
Sie den
Sound
und
drücken
Siememory
RECORD.
performance.
Alsogewünschten
your recorded
song
can
be
stored
into an SD
card. Die Kontrolllampe
Select the record
mode.
leuchtet auf und dieSelect
Lampe
von
Track
1
blinkt.
the desired voice and press the RECORD button, the RECORD lamp lights and the TRACK 1
Recording
Recording
The piano features comprehensive song recording functions that allow you to record your own
lamp
flashes. Also your recorded song can be stored into an SD memory card.
Recording
RECORDING Aperformance.
SONG
Select the record mode.
The piano features comprehensive song recording functions that allow you to record your own
Select the desired voice
and press theA
RECORD
the RECORD lamp lights and the TRACK 1
RECORDING
SONGbutton,
performance.
Also your recorded
song can be stored into an SD memory card.
lamp flashes.
Select the record mode.
Select the desired
and press the RECORD button, the RECORD lamp lights and the TRACK 1
RECORDING
A voice
SONG
Auto Accompaniment
styles can be recorded into the TRACK1. You can also use the LAYER and the
lamp flashes.
SPLIT
functions
when
you
record
a song.
Select
the record
mode.
Styles mit Begleitautomatik
können
in Spur
(Track)
1 aufgenommen werden. Sie können
Select the desired voice and press the RECORD button, the RECORD lamp lights and the TRACK 1
auch die Funktionenlamp
Layer
undrecording
Split benutzen,
wenn Sie einen Song aufnehmen.
Start
to the track1.
flashes.
Auto Accompaniment styles can be recorded into the TRACK1. You can also use the LAYER and the
Recording
starts
when playing the keyboard or pressing the PLAY/STOP button.
SPLIT functions when
you record
a song.
2. Die Aufnahme starten Sie, indem Sie beginnen zu spielen oder indem Sie PLAY/STOP
Auto
drücken.
Start recording
toAccompaniment
the track1. styles can be recorded into the TRACK1. You can also use the LAYER and the
SPLIT
functions
when you
a song.
Recording starts when
playing
the keyboard
or record
pressing
the PLAY/STOP button.
Auto Accompaniment styles can be recorded into the TRACK1. You can also use the LAYER and the
Start recording to the track1.
SPLIT functions when you record a song.
Recording starts when playing the keyboard or pressing the PLAY/STOP button.
Stop recording to the track1.
Start recording
the track1.
Recording
stops whentopressing
the PLAY/STOP button again.
Recording
starts
when
playing theflashes,
keyboard
pressing
the PLAY/STOP
The Track2
lamp
automatically
andoryou
can record
the second button.
part of the song to the Track2.
Stop recording to the track1.
3.
when pressing
the PLAY/STOP
again.
SieRecording
könnenstops
die Aufnahme
stoppen,
indembutton
Sie abermals
PLAY/STOP drücken. Die
The
Track2
lamp
automatically
flashes,
and
you
can
record
theso
second
of den
the song
to the Track2.
Lampe von Track 2 blinkt in Aufnahmebereitschaft,
dasspart
Sie
nächsten
Teil des
Stop recording to the track1.
Songs in Track 2 aufnehmen
können.
Recording stops
when pressing the PLAY/STOP button again.
If you
wantlamp
to hear
the recorded
song in
theyou
Track1,
press the
button.
The
Track2
automatically
flashes,
and
can record
theTRACK2
second part
of the song to the Track2.
Stop recording
to the track1.
Then, flashing lamp of the Track2 stops.
Recording stops when pressing the PLAY/STOP button again.
Press the PLAY/STOP button. The recorded song of the Track1 is played.
The Track2 lamp automatically flashes, and you can record the second part of the song to the Track2.
If you want to hear the recorded song in the Track1, press the TRACK2 button.
Then, flashing lamp of the Track2 stops.
Press the PLAY/STOP button. The recorded song of the Track1 is played.
If you want to hear the recorded song in the Track1, press the TRACK2 button.
Wenn Sie den aufgenommenen
Trackstops.
1 hören möchten, drücken Sie den Knopf
Then, flashingSong
lamp ofaus
the Track2
Press
the
PLAY/STOP
button.
The recorded
song of Sie
the Track1
is played.
TRACK2; das Blinken
hört
auf.
Drücken
Sie
nun
hören
diebutton.
Aufnahme von
Start
recording
to
track2.
If you want to hear the recorded songPLAY/STOP.
in the Track1, press
the
TRACK2
Recording
starts
when
playing
the
keyboard
or
pressing
the
PLAY/STOP
button.
Then,
flashing
lamp
of
the
Track2
stops.
Track 1.
Press the PLAY/STOP button. The recorded song of the Track1 is played.
Start recording to track2.
Recording starts when playing the keyboard or pressing the PLAY/STOP button.
Start recording to track2.
During recording
to theplaying
Track2,the
youkeyboard
can listenortopressing
the recorded
song of thebutton.
Track1.
Recording
starts when
the PLAY/STOP
Start recording to track2.
4.
Recording starts when playing the keyboard or pressing the PLAY/STOP button.
39beginnen
Aufnahme
in Track
2: Track2,
die Aufnahme
starten
indem
During recording
to the
you can listen
to the Sie,
recorded
songSie
of the
Track1. zu spielen oder
indem Sie PLAY/STOP drücken.
During recording to the Track2,
39 you can listen to the recorded song of the Track1.
During recording to the Track2, you can listen to the recorded song of the Track1.
39
39
Start recording to track2.
Recording starts when playing the keyboard or pressing the PLAY/STOP button.
During recording to the Track2, you can listen to the recorded song of the Track1.
Während Sie Spur 2 aufnehmen, können Sie den Song aus Spur 1 hören.
39
5. Stoppen Sie die Aufnahme, indem Sie PLAY/STOP drücken.
Stop recording.
Recording
Recording
Recording stops when pressing the PLAY/STOP button.
Stop recording.
Recording stops when pressing the PLAY/STOP button.
Stop recording.
PLAYBACK OF THE RECORDER SONG
Recording stops when pressing the PLAY
Playback of the recorded song.
Playback
Press the PLAY/STOP button again. The recorded song is played.
PLAYBACK
OF THE RECORDER
SONG
1. Drücken Sie PLAY/STOP.
Der aufgenommene
Song wird
abgespielt.
Playback of the recorded song.
Press the PLAY/STOP button again. The recorded song is played.
PLAYBACK OF THE RECORD
To delete the recorded track, press and hold the TRACK button about 2~3 seconds.
Playback of the recorded son
To delete the recorded song, press and hold the RECORD button about 2~3 seconds.
Press
the
PLAY/STOP
button again. The r
Backing Up the recorded song. Even if the power is turned off, the recorded
song
memory
is not deleted.
To delete the recorded track, press and hold the TRACK button about 2~3 seconds.
theden
play
mode.
ToReturn
delete
theto
recorded
song, TRACK-Knopf
press
and hold the RECORD
button
about 2~3 seconds.
Um eine Spur zu löschen,
halten
Sie
für
2-3 off.
Sekunden
gedrückt. Um
Press
the RECORD
button.
The
Record
lampisisturned
turned
Backing
Up the recorded
song.
Even
if the power
off, the recorded song memory is not deleted.
den ganzen Song zu löschen, halten Sie den Knopf RECORD für 2-3 Sekunden gedrückt.
Durch Abschalten des Pianos wird der Song nicht gelöscht.
To delete the recorded track, press and hold the
Return to the play mode.
To delete the recorded song, press and hold the
Press the RECORD
button. The Record
lamp
is turned
SAVING
A RECORDED
SONG
INTO
ANoff.
SD MEMORY
CARD
Backing Up the
recorded song. Even if the pow
2. Drücken Sie RECORD
um die Aufnahmefunktion
zu can
verlassen
undthe
um
Spielmodus
After recording
a song, the recorded song
be saved into
SDzum
memory
card.
zurückzukehren.
Return to the play mode.
Insert an SD memory card into the SD memory slot.
SAVING A RECORDED SONG
INTO AN SD MEMORY
CARD
Press the RECORD
button. The Record lam
Supported SD memory cards: This piano cannot support High Speed SD memory
After recording a song, the recorded
card 'SDsong
HC' can be saved into the SD memory card.
Sichern eines Songs
We recommend to use only an SD memory card with this piano.
is notSD
guaranteed
when slot.
any other types of card use.
Insert an SD memoryProper
cardoperation
into the
memory
SAVING A RECORDED SONG
If there is no SD memory card in the SD memory card slot, the LCD screen shows the
Supported SD memory cards: This piano cannot support High Speed SD memory
SD
card
errorMemory
pop-up display.
Sie können einen aufgenommenen Song auf der
SD
Card (SD-Karte)
speichern.
After recording
a song, the recorded song
card 'SD
HC'
Be sure to orient the SD memory card correctly when inserting it.
We recommend to use only an SD memory card with this piano.
Never try to force an SD memory card into the SD card slot when you feel resistance.
Proper operation is not guaranteed when any
other types
of card
use.
anorSD
int
Never remove the SD memory card fromInsert
the card slot
turnmemory
off the pianocard
while card
If des
there isPianos.
no SD memory card in the SD memory card slot, the LCD screen shows the
1. Schieben Sie eine SD-Karte in den Kartenslot
data is being accessed by a save, read or load operation. Doing so can corrupt the
data
Supporte
SD card error pop-up display.
on theSpeed
memory card
or even damage the card slot.
Beachten Sie bitte, dass das Piano keine High
SD
card 'SD HC'
Be sure to orient
the Memory
SD memory card correctly when inserting it.
We recom
Never
try
to
force
an
SD
memory
card
into
the
SD
card
slot
when
you
feel
resistance.
Cards (SD HC) unterstützt.
Bitte
Sie normale SD-Karten,
Call up
the benutzen
SD card menu.
Proper
Never remove the SD memory card from the card slot or turn off the piano
whileopera
card
Press and
hold down the
SETUP/KEYPAD
button. by
Press
theread
VPorPLAYER/SD
CARD
anderenfalls kann eine
einwandfreie
Funktion
there
is
datanicht
is beinggewähleistet
accessed
a save,
load operation.
Doingbutton.
so can corruptIfthe
data
SD card error
The
LCD
screen
shows
the
SD
card
menu.
on
the
memory
card
or
even
damage
the
card
slot.
werden. Wenn sich keine SD-Karte im Slot befindet, zeigt das
Be sure to
Never try
Display eine Fehlermeldung
Sie die SD-Karte richtig
Call upan.
theSchieben
SD card menu.
Never rem
Press
and
hold
down
the
SETUP/KEYPAD
button.
Press
the
VP
PLAYER/SD
CARD
button.
orientiert in den Kartenslot (siehe Abbildung). Wenden Sie dabei
data is being
The LCD screen shows the SD card menu.
on the memo
keinesfalls Gewalt an.
Entfernen Sie die Karte nicht und schalten
Sie das Piano nicht ab, so lange die Karte beschrieben wird, also
Call up the SD card menu.
Press and
down the SETUP/KEYPAD
Daten darauf gespeichert werden. Dies würde zum Datenverlust führen
undhold
könnte
The
LCD
screen
shows the SD card menu
eventuell sogar den Slot beschädigen.
40
2. Halten Sie den Knopf SETUP/KEYPAD gedrückt und drücken Sie zusätzlich den Knopf
VP PLAYER/SD CARD. Im Display erscheint ein Menü für die SD-Karte.
40
data is being accessed by a save, read or load operation. Doing so can corrupt the data
on the memory card or even damage the card slot.
Call up the SD card menu.
Press and hold down the SETUP/KEYPAD button. Press the VP PLAYER/SD CARD button.
The LCD screen shows the SD card menu.
Recording
3. Benutzen Sie die Knöpfe DATA +/- um zum Menüpunkt „Save
Recording Call up the save song pop-up display.
40 ENTER. Ein Pop-UpRecorded Song“
zu gelangen und drücken Sie
Go to the SAVE RECORDED SONG by using DATA UP and DOWN buttons and
Fenster erscheint.
press
thesave
ENTER
button.
Call up
the
song
pop-up display.
The
save
song
pop-up
appears.
Recording
Go to the SAVE RECORDED SONG by
using DATA UP and DOWN buttons and
4. Vergeben
des
Songnamens:
ändern Sie den Großbuchstaben in der
press the ENTER button.
Save
the
recorded
intogewünschte
the SD memory
card.
BoxThe
mitsave
Hilfe
Tasten
DATA +/-song
bis der
Buchstabe
songder
pop-up
appears.
Call up
the
save
song pop-up
display.
Change
the
big-character
in
the
box
by
using
the
DATA
UP
and DOWN buttons and when a desired
erscheint
drücken
Sie
dann
Enter.
Nun
können
Sie den
Go to the und
SAVE
RECORDED
SONG
by character
using
DATA
UPpress
and
DOWN
buttons
andnächsten Buchstaben
character
appears
in
the
box,
the
ENTER
button.
the
song
into
the
SD
memory card.
aussuchen
undrecorded
wiederum
ENTER
bestätigen.
Namen
komplett
haben
pressSave
the ENTER
button.
After
selecting
first mit
character
of your
desired songWenn
name, Sie
you den
can select
the next
character.
The way
Change
the
big-character
in the box by using the DATA UP and DOWN buttons and when a desired
The
save
song
pop-up
appears.
drücken
Sie
ENTER.
Es
eine
Meldung,
dass
der
Song
gesichert
ist
und
of„.“
theund
selecting
character
iserscheint
same as above.
character appears in the character box, press the ENTER button.
If kehrt
you finish
selecting
all characters,
select '.' and press the ENTER button.
dasAfter
Display
zum
Hauptmenü
zurück.
selecting first character of your desired song name, you can select the next character. The way
Save
the recorded song into the SD memory card.
of the selecting character is same as above.
saving message
The
LCD screen
to main.
Change theThe
big-character
in thepop-up
box byappears.
using the
DATA
UP andgoes
DOWN
buttons and when a desired
IfSpeichern
you finish selecting
all characters,
select '.' and
the Sekunden,
ENTER button.abhängig von der Größe der
des
Songs
dauert
10press
bis 60
• Dascharacter
appears
in the
character
box,etwa
press the
ENTER
button.
It takes
seconds
savedesired
the recorded
song
data into
SD select
memorythe
card.
The character.
saving time is
depend
After
selecting
first 10~60
character
of to
your
song
name,
youthecan
next
The
wayon the size of
Datenmenge.
The saving
message
the
recorded pop-up
song data.appears. The LCD screen goes to main.
of the selecting
character
isnicht
same
as above.
SieNever
die
Kartethe
und
schalten
Sieslotdas
Piano
nicht
ab,
sodatalange
remove
SD memory
card
from the card
or turn
off the piano
while
card
is beingDaten
accessed by a save, read
• Entfernen
If you
finish
all
characters,
'.'the
and
press
ENTER
button.
orselecting
load
operation.
Doing
so
canselect
corrupt
data
onthe
thethe
memory
card
or even
damage
the is
card
slot. on the size of
It
takes
10~60
seconds
to
save
the
recorded
song
data
into
SD
memory
card.
The
saving
time
depend
gespeichert oder
geladen werden. Dies würde zum Datenverlust führen und könnte
If the
same name exists, the error pop-up appears and the recorded song is not saved. In this case, you need to another name.
the recorded song
data.
The
song
file
is save
intofrom
the the
'SONG_DIR'
the
'SYSTEM'
folder
of the
card. These
files can
eventuell
sogar
den
Slot
beschädigen.
remove
the SD pop-up
memory
card
card
slot folder
or turninoff
the
piano
while
card
dataSD
is memory
being accessed
by a save,
readbe deleted or
TheNever
saving
message
appears.
The
LCD
screen
goes
to main.
copiedDoing
in your
PC.
or
load
operation.
so
can
corrupt
the
data
on
the
memory
card
or
even
damage
the
card
slot.
Songname
bereits
erscheint
eine
Fehlermeldung
und
der
Song
wird
• WennIfder
If theexists,
piano
does
haveexistiert,
any recorded
song
in thesong
piano
memory,
After
LCD
screen
shows
the name.
error
pop-up
display and
the same
name
the
errornot
pop-up
appears
anddata
the
recorded
is not
saved.
InThe
thisthe
case,
you
need
to another
It takes
10~60
seconds
to
save
the
recorded
song
into
thethe
SDSD
memory
card.
saving
time
is depend
on the size of
goes
to
main
menu.
The
song
data
is not
saved
into
memory
card.
nicht
gesichert.
In
diesem
Fall
müssen
Sie
Ihren
neuen
Song
umbenennen.
The
song
file
is
save
into
the
'SONG_DIR'
folder
in
the
'SYSTEM'
folder
of
the
SD
memory
card.
These
files
can
be
deleted
or
the recorded song data.
your PC.the SD memory card from the card slot or turn off the piano while card data is being accessed by a save, read
Neverinremove
Song
wird innot
einem
Ordner
namens
„SONG_DIR“
im Systemordner
der SD-Karte
• Der copied
If the
piano does
recorded
songon
in the
memory,
LCD screen
shows
or load
operation.
Doing have
so canany
corrupt
the data
the piano
memory
card orAfter
eventhe
damage
the card
slot.the error pop-up display and
goes
to
main
menu.
The
song
data
is
not
saved
into
the
SD
memory
card.
gesichert.
Von
dort
aus
können
Sie
ihn
löschen
oder
in
Ihren
Computer
kopieren.
If the same name exists, the error pop-up appears and the recorded song is not saved. In this case, you need to another name.
songPiano
file is save
into the 'SONG_DIR'
folder in the 'SYSTEM'
folder
the SD memoryhat,
card. der
These gesichert
files can be deleted
or
das
keinen
aufgenommenen
Song
imof Speicher
werden
• WennThe
copied in your PC.
kann,If erscheint
the piano does eine
not haveFehlermeldung.
any recorded song in the piano memory, After the LCD screen shows the error pop-up display and
goes to main menu. The song data is not saved into the SD memory card.
LOADING A RECORDED SONG FROM THE SD MEMORY CARD
The recorded song can be loaded from the SD memory card.
LOADINGInsert
A RECORDED
SONG
FROM
THE
MEMORY
an SD memory
card
into the
SDSD
memory
slot. CARD
The recorded
can be loaded
from the SD
memory
See song
the SAVING
THE RECORDED
SONG
INTOcard.
AN SD MEMORY CARD section on page40.
Call up the SD card menu.
Insert an SD memory card into the SD memory slot.
LOADING
RECORDED
SONG
FROM
THE
SD
MEMORY
CARD
PressAand
hold
down theSONG
SETUP/KEYPAD
Press
the VP
PLAYER/SD
CARD button.
See the SAVING
THE
RECORDED
INTO
AN SDbutton.
MEMORY
CARD
section
on
page40.
The recorded song can be loaded from the SD memory card.
The
LCD screen
showsSD-Karte
the SD card menu.
Laden eines
Songs
von
der
Call up
the SD
card
menu.
Insert
anCall
SD up
memory
card
intopop-up
the SDPress
memory
the
load
song
display.
Press
and hold
down
the
SETUP/KEYPAD
button.
the VP slot.
PLAYER/SD CARD button.
Go
to the
LOAD
SONG
by using
DATA
UP andCARD
DOWN
buttons
press the ENTER button.
See
SAVING
THE
RECORDED
SONG
INTO
AN SD
MEMORY
section
onand
page40.
Thethe
LCD
screen
shows
theRECORDED
SDin
card
menu.
1. Legen
Sie
eine
SD-Karte
den
Kartenslot
ein.
The
load
song
pop-up
appears.
2. Halten
SieupSETUP(KEYPAD
gedrückt und drücken Sie währenddessen den Knopf VP
Call
SD
card
menu.
Call
upthe
the
load
song
pop-up
display.
Load
a
song
data(file).
PLAYER/SD
Display
erscheint
das
SD-Kartenmenü.
Press
holdCARD.
down
theIm
SETUP/KEYPAD
button.
the
VPbuttons
PLAYER/SD
CARD
Go toand
the LOAD
RECORDED
SONG
by using
DATA
UPPress
and DOWN
and press
thebutton.
ENTER button.
Selectshows
a desired
song
data(file)
in the song list by using DATA UP and DOWN buttons and press the ENTER
The
screen
the
SD
card
menu.
3. Gehen
Sie
mit
Hilfe
der
Knöpfe
DATA
+/zum
Menüpunkt
„LOAD
RECORDED
SONG“
TheLCD
load
song
pop-up
appears.
button.
und drücken
Sie
ENTER.
Das
entsprechende
Pop-Up-Fenster
erscheint.
The
loading
song
pop-up
display
appears in the
LCD screen.
Load
a the
song
data(file).
Call
up
load
song
pop-up
display.
After
loading
the+/song
the pop-up
disappear
and
the
is ready
to
the
recorded
song.
4. Wählen
mit
DATA
den
Song
aus
und
bestätigen
Sie
Ihre
Auswahl
Select
aSie
desired
song
data(file)
in data,
the
song
list
by using
DATA
UP
andpiano
DOWN
buttons
and
press
the ENTER
Go
to the
LOAD
RECORDED
SONG
by gewünschten
using
DATA
UP
and
DOWN
buttons
and
press
theplay
ENTER
button.
button.
The
load
song
pop-up
appears.
mit ENTER. Der Song wird geladen, das Pop-Up-Fenster verschwindet und das Piano
loading song pop-up display appears in the LCD screen.
ist The
bereit,
den
Song
abzuspielen.
Load
a song
data(file).
After
loading
the song
data, the pop-up disappear and the piano is ready to play the recorded song.
Select a desired song data(file) in the song list by using DATA UP and DOWN buttons and press the ENTER
button.
The loading song pop-up display appears in the LCD screen.
After loading the song data, the pop-up disappear and the piano is ready to play the recorded song.
41
41
41
Registration
Registration
Registration
Registration
Registration
Eine Registration ist eine Erfassung Ihrer Einstellungen bezüglich Rhythmus, Sound,
Begleitautomatik und anderer Parameter, die Sie nutzen. Sie könne diese Einstellungen
auf
Knopfdruck
speichern
jederzeit
wieder
laden. Das Piano
über 5
A Registration
is a particular
setupund
of rhythm,
sound,
Auto Accompaniment
or any verfügt
other parameters
Registation-Speicherplätze.
or
features
you
are
using.
To
change
the
functions
during
playing
you
can
store
your
desired
A Registration is a particular setup of rhythm, sound, Auto Accompaniment or any other parameters
conditions
oneare
button.
then if you
the button,
desired
will
bedesired
loadedrecording.
Stop
or
features in
you
using.And
To change
theselect
functions
duringyour
playing
youconditions
can store
your
Registration
immediately.
conditions
in one button. And then if you select the button, your desired conditions willRecording
be loadedstops when pressing the PLAY
There are 5 Registration pads (1~5).
immediately.
Aufrufen
einer Registration
There
are 5 Registration
pads (1~5).
Registration
RECALL A REGISTRATION MEMORY
RECALL
A REGISTRATION
MEMORY
Press andishold
down the
RECALL
button
and press
REGISTRATION button.
A Registration
a particular
setup
of rhythm,
sound,
AutoaAccompaniment
or any other parameters
or features
youhold
aredown
using.the
ToRECALL
changebutton
the functions
during
playing youbutton.
can store your desired
Press and
and press
a REGISTRATION
conditions in one button. And then if you select the button, your desired conditions will be loaded
immediately.
PLAYBACK OF THE RECORD
There are 5 Registration pads (1~5).
Halten Sie den Knopf RECALL gedrückt und drücken Sie REGISTRATION.
Playback of the recorded son
RECALL
A REGISTRATION
MEMORY
STORING
A REGISTRATION
MEMORY
Speichern
einer
Registration
STORING
A
REGISTRATION
MEMORY
Press Press
and hold
the RECALL
button
and press
a REGISTRATION
button.
anddown
hold down
the STORE
button
and press
a REGISTRATION
button.
Press the PLAY/STOP button again. The r
Press and hold down the STORE button and press a REGISTRATION button.
Halten Sie STORE gedrückt und drücken Sie REGISTRATION.
When a A
registration
memory is stored, the
LCD screen shows the registration pop-up display.
STORING
REGISTRATION
MEMORY
When a registration memory is stored, the LCD screen shows the registration pop-up display.
Press and
hold down the STORE button and press a REGISTRATION button.
SAVING A
REGISTRATION
DATAein
INTO
AN SD MEMORY CARD
Während
des
Speicherns erscheint
Pop-Up-Fenster.
To delete the recorded track, press and hold the
To delete the recorded song, press and hold the
Backing Up the recorded song. Even if the pow
Return to the play mode.
Press the RECORD button. The Record lam
The registration
data can be saved into
the SD memory
card.SD MEMORY CARD
SAVING
A REGISTRATION
DATA
INTO AN
The registration data can be saved into the SD memory card.
Insert an SD memory card into the SD memory slot.
SAVING A RECORDED SONG
Supported
SDeine
memory
cards: This piano
SD recording
memory
Speichern
Registration
auf
After
a song, the recorded song
Insert aneiner
SD memory
card
into
the
SD SD-Karte
memory
slot.cannot support High Speed
card 'SD HC'
Supported
SD memory
cards:
This
piano
cannot
support
High Speed SD memory
When a registration memory is stored, the LCD
screen
shows
the
registration
pop-up
display.
We
recommend
to use
only
an SD
memory
card with
this piano.
Insert an SD memory card int
card
'SDoperation
HC'
Proper
is
not
guaranteed
when
any
other
types
of
card
use.
1. Schieben Sie eine SD-Karte
in den use
Kartenslot
des card
Pianos.
We
recommend
onlycard
an SD
memory
with
this
piano.
Supporte
If there
is no SDto
memory
in the
SD memory
card
slot,
the LCD screen shows the
Proper
operation
is notdisplay.
guaranteed
whenSpeed
any other types
card use.
Beachten Sie bitte, dass
das
keine
High
SD ofMemory
card 'SD HC'
SD card
errorPiano
pop-up
IfBethere
istono
SD memory
card in the
memory
cardinserting
slot, the it.
LCD screen shows the
We recom
sureBitte
orient
the SD memory
cardSD
correctly
when
Cards data
(SDcan
HC)
benutzen
normale
SD-Karten,
The registration
be unterstützt.
saved into
the
SD
memory
card. Sie
SD card
error
pop-up
display.
Never
try to
force an
SD memory card into the SD card slot when you feel resistance.
Proper opera
sureremove
to orientthe
theSD
SD
memorycard
cardnicht
correctly
when
inserting
it. the piano while card
anderenfalls kann eine Be
einwandfreie
Funktion
Never
memory
from
thegewähleistet
card
slot
or turn off
If there is
Never
try toaccessed
force
an SD
cardorinto
theoperation.
SD card slot
when
resistance.
Insert
an
SD
memory
card
into
the
SD
memory
slot.
data
is being
by memory
a save, read
load
Doing
so you
can feel
corrupt
the data
SD
card error
werden. Wenn sich keine
SD-Karte
im
Slot
befindet,
zeigt
removecard
the or
SD
memory
card
from
theslot.
card
slot ordas
turn off the piano while card
onNever
the memory
even
damage
the
card
Be sure to
Supported
SD memory
cards:
This
piano
cannot
support High
Speed
SDcorrupt
memory
data
is
being
accessed
by
a
save,
read
or
load
operation.
Doing
so
can
the
data
Display eine Fehlermeldung
an. Schieben Sie die SD-Karte richtig
Never try
card 'SD
onHC'
the memory card or even damage the card slot.
Call up the SD card
menu.
Never rem
We
recommend
to
use
only
an
SD
memory
card
with
this
piano.
orientiert
in
den
Kartenslot
(siehe
Abbildung).
Wenden
SieCARD
dabei
data is being
Press
and
hold
down
the
SETUP/KEYPAD
button.
Press
the
VP
PLAYER/SD
button.
Proper
operation
is
not
guaranteed
when
any
other
types
of
card
use.
Call up the Gewalt
SD cardan.
menu.
on the memo
Entfernen
Siecard
die
Karte
nichtcard
und
If there
ismenu.
no SD memory
in the
SD memory
slot, schalten
the LCD screen shows the
Thekeinesfalls
LCD
shows
the
SD
card
Press
andscreen
hold down
the
SETUP/KEYPAD
button.
Press
the
VP PLAYER/SD
CARD button.
SD
card
error
pop-up
display.
Piano
ab,
so
lange die Karte beschrieben wird, also
Call up the SD card menu.
TheSie
LCD das
screen
showsnicht
the SD
menu.
Becard
sure to
orient the SD memory card correctly when inserting it.
Press and
down the SETUP/KEYPAD
Daten darauf gespeichert
Dies würde
zum
Datenverlust
undhold
könnte
Never try towerden.
force an SD memory
card into the
SD card
slot when you feelführen
resistance.
Never remove the SD memory card from the card slot or turn off the piano while
card
The
LCD
screen
shows the SD card menu
eventuell sogar den
Slot beschädigen.
data is being accessed by a save, read or load operation. Doing so can corrupt the data
on the memory card or even damage the card slot.
SAVING A REGISTRATION DATA INTO AN SD MEMORY CARD
2. Halten
SETUP/KEYPAD
gedrückt und drücken Sie VP PLAYER/SD CARD. Das SDCall
up the Sie
SD card
menu.
Press andKartenmenü
hold down the erscheint
SETUP/KEYPAD
button. Press42
the VP PLAYER/SD CARD button.
im Display.
The LCD screen shows the SD card menu.
42
42
Registration
Call up the save registration pop-up display.
Registration
Go to theSie
SAVEdie
RECORDED
by using
DATA
UP and
DOWN buttons
and Reg.“ zu gelangen und
3. Benutzen
KnöpfeSONG
DATA
+/- um
zum
Menüpunkt
„Save
press
the
ENTER
button.
drücken
Sie ENTER. Ein Pop-Up-Fenster erscheint.
Registration
The save song pop-up appears.
Call up the save registration pop-up display.
Go toDateinamens:
the SAVE RECORDED
SONG by
using
DATA
UP and DOWN buttons
and
4. Vergeben
des
ändern
Sie
den
Großbuchstaben
in der
Call
the
save
registration
pop-up
display.
Saveup
the
registration
data
into
the SD
memory
card.
press
the
ENTER
button.
to the
SAVE
RECORDED
SONG
using
DATA
UPgewünschte
and
DOWN
buttons
andbuttons and when a desired
BoxGo
mit
Hilfe
der
Tasten
DATA
+/-bybis
derthe
Buchstabe
Change
the
in
theby
box
using
DATA
UP and
DOWN
Thebig-character
save
song pop-up
appears.
press
the
ENTER
button.
character
appears
in
the
character
box,
press
the
ENTER
button.
erscheint und drücken Sie dann Enter. Nun können Sie den nächsten
The
save
song pop-up
appears.of your desired song name, you can select the next character. The way
After
selecting
first character
Save
the registration
datamit
into
the SDbestätigen.
memory card.
Buchstaben
aussuchen
und wiederum
ENTER
Wenn Sie den Namen
of the selecting character is same as above.
Change
the
big-character
in
the
box
by
using
the
DATA
UPeine
and DOWN
buttons and when a desired
komplett
haben
drücken
Sie
„.“
und
ENTER.
Es
erscheint
If you
finish
selecting
all characters, select
andSD
press
the ENTER
button. Meldung, dass die Datei
Save
the
registration
into '.'the
memory
card.
character
appears in data
the character
box, press
the ENTER
button.
gesichert
ist
und
das Display
kehrt
zum
Hauptmenü
zurück.
Change the
big-character
in the
box
by of
using
DATAsong
UP and
DOWN
and
when
desired The way
After
selecting first
character
yourthe
desired
name,
you buttons
can select
the
nextacharacter.
The saving
message
pop-up
appears.
LCD
screen
goes
to main.
character
appears
in the
character
box,The
press
the
ENTER
button.
of the selecting character is same as above.
After selecting first character of your desired song name, you can select the next character. The way
If you
finishto
selecting
all characters,
and
press
des
Songs
dauert
etwa
5select
bis
15
Sekunden.
• DasofSpeichern
It
takes
5~15
seconds
saveisthe
registration
data into
the
SD'.'
memory
card. the ENTER button.
the selecting
character
same
as above.
Never
remove
the SD
memory
card from
theschalten
card
turn
offthe
theENTER
piano
while
card
dataab,
is being
a save, read
Sieselecting
die
Karte
nicht
und
Sie
das
Piano
nicht
soaccessed
langebyDaten
• Entfernen
If you
finish
all characters,
select
'.'slot
andorpress
button.
or load operation.
Doing so
can corrupt
the dataappears.
on the memory
card or
even damage
themain.
card slot.
The saving
message
pop-up
The LCD
screen
goes to
gespeichert
geladen
werden.
Datenverlust
führen
könnte
If the sameoder
name exists,
the error pop-up
appearsDies
and the würde
registrationzum
data is not
saved. In this case, you
need to und
use another
name.
TheThe
saving
message
pop-up
appears.
The
LCDfolder
screen
goes
to main.
registration
data
file
is save
into
the the
'REG_DIR'
in the
folder ofcard.
the SD memory card. These files can be
It takes
5~15
seconds
to save
registration
data
into'SYSTEM'
the SD memory
eventuell
sogar
den
Slot
beschädigen.
deleted or copied
in your
PC. the SD memory card from the card slot or turn off the piano while card data is being accessed by a save, read
Never
remove
Songname
bereits
existiert,
erscheint
eine
Fehlermeldung
und
• WennIt der
takes 5~15
seconds
to save
the registration
datathe
into
the on
SD the
memory
card.
or load
operation.
Doing
so can
corrupt
data
memory
card
or even damage the card
slot.der Song wird
Never
remove
the
SD
memory
card
from
thepop-up
card slot
or turn
offthe
the
piano while
card
data
is being
accessed
byneed
a save,
read
If the
same
name exists,
the
error
appears
and
registration
data
is not
saved.
In this
case, you
to use
another name.
nicht
gesichert.
In
diesem
Fall
müssen
Sie
Ihren
neuen
Song
umbenennen.
or load operation.
Doing
so can corrupt
the
memory
cardfolder
or even
the card
slot.of the SD memory card. These files can be
The
registration
data filethe
is data
save on
into
the
'REG_DIR'
in damage
the 'SYSTEM'
folder
wird
Ordner
namens
„REG_DIR“
Systemordner
der
SD-Karte
If the same
namein
exists,
the error
pop-up
and the registration
data is notim
saved.
In this case, you need to
use another
name.
• Der Song
deleted
oreinem
copied
in your
PC. appears
The registration data file is save into the 'REG_DIR' folder in the 'SYSTEM' folder of the SD memory card. These files can be
gesichert.
Von
dort
aus
können
Sie
ihn
löschen
oder
in
Ihren
Computer
kopieren.
deleted or copied in your PC.
LOADING A REGISTRATION DATA FROM THE SD MEMORY CARD
The registration data can be loaded from the SD memory card.
Insert
an SD memory
card into the SDDATA
memory
slot. THE SD MEMORY CARD
LOADING
A REGISTRATION
FROM
See the SAVING A REGISTRATION DATA INTO AN SD MEMORY CARD section on page42.
The registration
data can be loaded
from
the SD memory
card.
LOADING
A REGISTRATION
DATA
FROM
THE SD
MEMORY CARD
Laden
Registration
der
SD-Karte
Theeiner
registration
data
bevon
loaded
from
the SD memory card.
Call up
the
SDcan
card
menu.
an SETUP/KEYPAD
SD memory card
into
thethe
SD
slot.
Press and holdInsert
down the
button.
Press
VPmemory
PLAYER/SD
CARD button.
See
SAVING
DATA
INTO AN SD
MEMORY CARD section on page42.
anthe
SD
memory
card
into the
SD memory
slot.
TheInsert
LCD screen
shows
the A
SDREGISTRATION
card
menu.
1. Legen
Sie
eine ASD-Karte
in den
Kartenslot
ein.
See the
SAVING
REGISTRATION
DATA
INTO AN SD
MEMORY CARD section on page42.
Callload
up the
SD card
menu.
2. HaltenCall
Sieup
SETUP(KEYPAD
gedrückt
unddisplay.
drücken Sie währenddessen den Knopf VP
the
registration
pop-up
Press
and
hold
down
the
SETUP/KEYPAD
button.buttons
Press the
VPpress
PLAYER/SD
CARD
button.
Call
up
the
SD
card
menu.
Go
to
the
LOAD
REGISTRATION
by
using
DATA
UP
and
DOWN
and
the ENTER
button.
PLAYER/SD
CARD.
Im
Display
erscheint
das
SD-Kartenmenü.
The
LCD
screen
shows
the
SD
card
menu.
Press
and
hold
down
the
SETUP/KEYPAD
button.
Press
the
VP
PLAYER/SD
CARD
button.
The load
regist
pop-up
appears.
3. Gehen
Sie
mit shows
Hilfe the
der
Knöpfe
DATA +/- zum Menüpunkt „LOAD REGISTRATION“ und
The LCD
screen
SD
card menu.
Call
up
the
load
registration
pop-up display. erscheint.
Load
a
registration
data(file).
drücken Sie ENTER. Das entsprechende Pop-Up-Fenster
Call
up
load
pop-up
display.
Go the
to the
LOADregistration
REGISTRATION
by
using file
DATA
UPusing
and DOWN
buttons
and press
the ENTER
button.
Select
a
desired
registration
data(file)
in
the
regist
list by
DATAbestätigen
UP and DOWN
buttons
press
4. Wählen
Sie
mit
DATA
+/- die
gewünschte
Datei
aus
und
Sie
Ihreand
Auswahl
Go
the LOAD
REGISTRATION
by using
DATA UP and DOWN buttons and press the ENTER button.
The
load
regist pop-up
appears.
thetoENTER
button.
mitThe
ENTER.
Die
Einstellungen
werden
geladen,
das Pop-Up-Fenster verschwindet und
load
regist
pop-up
appears.
The
loading
regist
pop-up
display appears
in the
LCD screen.
Load
a data,
registration
data(file).
dasAfter
Piano
ist
bereit,
einen
Song
mit
den
geladenen
abzuspielen.
loading
the
regist
the
pop-up
disappear
and
the
piano
isEinstellungen
ready to play the recorded
song.
LoadSelect
a registration
data(file).
a desired registration
data(file) in the regist file list by using DATA UP and DOWN buttons and press
Select a desired
registration
the ENTER
button.data(file) in the regist file list by using DATA UP and DOWN buttons and press
the ENTERThe
button.
loading regist pop-up display appears in the LCD screen.
The loading
regist
pop-up
appears
in the disappear
LCD screen.
After
loading
the display
regist data,
the pop-up
and the piano is ready to play the recorded song.
After loading the regist data, the pop-up disappear and the piano is ready to play the recorded song.
SMF-Player
43
„SMF“ steht für „Standard MIDI File“. Hierbei handelt43es sich um ein Dateiformat, das
erlaubt, MIDI-Daten zwischen Software und 43
Sequenzern auszutauschen. Es gibt
insgesamt 3 Arten von SMF-Formaten: SMF 0, 1 und 2. Das Piano unterstützt SMF 0 und
1, die heutzutage weit verbreitet sind, so dass immer, wenn hier von SMF-Daten die Rede
ist, diese gemeint sind.
SMF Player
to the
play mode.
between different software and sequencers. There are actually three SMF formats,Return
named SMF
0, SMF
Press
the
RECORD
button.
1 and SMF 2. The piano supports the SMF 0 and SMF 1 format, which are widely
used
today,
and so
all The Record lam
The of
letters
Standard
file,0which
is and
a fileSMF
format
that allows MIDI data to be shared
mentions
"SMF"SMF"
data"stand
in thisfor
manual
referMIDI
to SMF
format
1 format.
between different software and sequencers. There are actually three SMF formats, named SMF 0, SMF
1 and SMF 2. The piano supports the SMF 0 and SMF 1 format, which are widely used today, and so all
mentions of "SMF data" in this manual refer to SMF 0 format and SMF 1 SAVING
format.
A RECORDED SONG
PLAYBACK
OF
A
STANDARD
MIDI
FILE
Abspielen eines MIDI-Files
After recording a song, the recorded song
Insert
an SD memory
card into theMIDI
SD card
slot on the piano. Insert an SD memory card int
PLAYBACK
OF AinSTANDARD
FILE
1. Schieben
Sie
eine SD-Karte
den Kartenslot des
Pianos.
The SD memory card should have SMF data in SMF_FILE folder.
Supporte
Beachten Sie bitte, dass das Piano keine High Speed SD Memory
card 'SD HC'
Insert an SD memory card into the SD card slot on the piano.
We recom
Cards (SD HC)
unterstützt. PREPARATION
Bitte benutzen
Sieinnormale
SD-Karten,
The SD memory card1)should
have
SMF to
data
folder.
Proper opera
Download
SMF(*.mid)
your PCSMF_FILE
at a music website.
anderenfalls kann eine einwandfreie
Funktion
nicht
gewähleistet
If there is
2) Save the SMF to
your SD memory
card from
your PC.
SD card error
The
SMF
should
saved
into
'SMF_FILE'
folder
in
'SYSTEM'
folder
of
the
SD
memory
card.
PREPARATION
werden. Wenn sich keine SD-Karte im Slot befindet, zeigt das
Be sure to
The bundle
SD memory
card has
which
has SMF_FILE folder.
Download
SMF(*.mid)
tosystem
your PCfolder,
at a music
website.
Never try
Display eine FehlermeldungSupported
an.1)
die
SD-Karte
richtig
SDthe
memory
cards:
This
piano
cannot
support
High Speed SD memory card 'SD HC'
2)Schieben
Save
SMF toSie
your SD
memory
card
from
your
PC.
Never rem
We
recommend
to
use
only
an
SD
memory
card
with
this
piano.
Proper
operation
is
not
The
SMF
should
saved
into
'SMF_FILE'
folder
in
'SYSTEM'
folder
of
the
SD
memory
card.
orientiert in den Kartenslot (siehe Abbildung). Wenden Sie dabei
data is being
guaranteed
when
anySD
other
types card
of card
The
bundle
memory
hasuse.
system folder, which has SMF_FILE folder.
on the memo
keinesfalls Gewalt an. Entfernen
die
Karte
nicht
und
schalten
Be sure Supported
toSie
orient
the
memory
card correctly
when
inserting
SDSD
memory
cards:
This
piano
cannot
supportit.High Speed SD memory card 'SD HC'
Never
try
to
force
an
SD
memory
card
into
the
SD
card
slot
when
you
feel
resistance.
We
recommend
to
use
only
an
SD
memory
card
with
this
piano.
Proper
operation
is
not
Sie das Piano nicht ab, so lange
die Karte
beschrieben
wird,slotalso
Call up the SD card menu.
Never
remove the
SD memory
from
the card
or turn off the piano while card data is
guaranteed
when
any othercard
types
of card
use.
Pressthe
and
hold
down
the SETUP/KEYPAD
Daten darauf gespeichert being
werden.
Dies
würde
Datenverlust
führen
und
könnte
accessed
bytoa orient
save,
read
orzum
load
operation.
Doing so
can
corrupt
data
on the
memory
Be sure
the SD
memory
card correctly
when
inserting
it.
The
LCD
screen
shows
the SD card menu
card or even
damage
the
card
slot.
Never
try
to
force
an
SD
memory
card
into
the
SD
card
slot
when
you
feel
resistance.
eventuell sogar den Slot beschädigen.
Never remove the SD memory card from the card slot or turn off the piano while card data is
being accessed by a save, read or load operation. Doing so can corrupt the data on the memory
card or even damage the card slot.
2. Halten SieCall
SETUP/KEYPAD
up the SD card gedrückt
menu. und drücken Sie VP PLAYER/SD CARD. Das SDPress and
hold downim
theDisplay.
SETUP/KEYPAD button. Press the VP PLAYER/SD CARD button.
Kartenmenü
erscheint
The LCD screen
shows
card menu.
menu.
Call up
thethe
SDSDcard
Press and hold down the SETUP/KEYPAD button. Press the VP PLAYER/SD CARD button.
The LCD screen shows the SD card menu.
the
SMF player
pop-up
display.
3. Gehen SieCall
mitup
den
Knöpfen
DATA
+/- zum
Menüpunkt „SMF PLAYER“ und drücken Sie
Go
to
the
SMF
PLAYER
by
using
DATA
UP
and
DOWN
buttons and press the
ENTER.
ENTER button.
Call
up
the
SMF
player
pop-up
display.
4. WählenThe
Sie
einen Song
aus
mit Hilfe der Knöpfe DATA +/-. Im Ordner
SMF
pop-up
appears.
Go player
to the SMF
PLAYER
by using DATA UP and DOWN buttons and press the
„SMF_FILE“ENTER
können
99 Dateien gesichert werden. Dateien, die in
button.
diesem Ordner
liegen,
vom Piano abgespielt werden.
The SMF
pop-up appears.
Select
anplayer
SMF.können
Innerhalb
dieses
Ordners
mit
Computer
Choose
a desired
SMF by können
using DATA
UPdem
and DOWN
buttons.weitere
Unterordner angelegt
werden.
Select an SMF.
Including folder 99 files can be stored into the SMF_FILE folder. If you put over 99 files, piano is not supported.
Choose
a desired SMF
bydas
using
DATA
UP and
buttons.
5. Drücken The
Siepiano
PLAY/STOP
um
Playback
desDOWN
Songs
zu starten. Drücken Sie den
can playback SMFs
in the
SMF_FILE
folder in SYSTEM
folder.
It's available um
to usees
folders
in SMF_FILE
folder. The folder can be created in your PC.
Knopf abermals
wieder
anzuhalten.
Including folder 99 files can be stored into the SMF_FILE folder. If you put over 99 files, piano is not supported.
The piano can playback SMFs in the SMF_FILE folder in SYSTEM folder.
•
•
•
•
•
•
It's available to use folders in SMF_FILE folder. The folder can be created in your PC.
Die Lautstärke-Einstellung
funktioniert wie unter „Lautstärke für die Begleitautomatik“
beschrieben.
Diese Funktion benutzt MIDI Control Message 11 (Expression). Wenn das SMF diese
44
Mitteilung enthält, arbeitet diese Funktion nicht korrekt.
Wenn Sie ein SMF 1-File abspielen, dauert die Konvertierung
ins SMF-Format 10-60
44
Sekunden.
Sie können das Tempo mit den Knöpfen TEMPO +/- verändern. Wenn Sie die Tasten
gleichzeitig drücken, wird das Originaltempo wieder hergestellt.
Wenn Sie den Song wiederholen möchten, drücken Sie während des Playbacks den
Knopf TR1/R.
Wenn Sie alle Songs abspielen möchten, drücken Sie TR1/A.
Local Control (versteckte Funktion)
Bei dieser Funktion handelt es sich um einen speziellen Modus, der dann zum Tragen
kommt, wenn das Piano mit MIDI-Geräten oder einem Computer verbunden ist. Wenn
„Local On“ geschaltet ist, hören Sie Ihr Pianospiel aus den internen Lautsprechern,
Local control refers to the fact that, normally, the piano keyboard controls its internal tone generator,
allowing the internal voices to be played directly from the keyboard.
This situation is called Local Control ON. When the local control is set to off, the keyboard and sound
source are separated and no sound is heard through the piano when playing the keyboard.
the data of the keyboard performance is output through MIDI. By setting local control to off,
während die However,
Daten via
MIDI-Port zum angeschlossenen Gerät geschickt werden. Wenn
you can play an external MIDI tone generator from the keyboard of the piano without sounding the
„Local Off“ eingeschaltet
internal voices. ist, hören Sie nichts, die MIDI-Daten werden aber trotzdem
gesendet. Auf diese Weise können Sie Ihre Tastatur als Keyboard benutzen, den Sound
LOCAL
CONTROL
ON/OFF
aber von derTHE
Externen
Quelle
beziehen.
Press
and hold down thegedrückt
KEYPAD button
and press Sie
RIGHT
KEY(C8)
Halten Sie den
KEYPAD-Knopf
und drücken
dieEND
Taste
C8 of
keyboard.
The
pop-up
Display
shows
oFF,
the
piano
does
not
send
the
control
auf der Tastatur. Im Pop-Up-Fenster erscheint „Local Off“. Wenn Sie
signals to local sound generator.
den VorgangThe
wiederholen,
erscheint
„Local
On“. MIDI signal.
piano sound can
be generated
by external
Press KEYPAD with RIGHT END KEY(C8) again, the Local control will be ON.
General MIDI Voice & Drum Table
45 Drums
Liste
der General
Voices
und
General
MIDIMIDI
Voice
& Drum
Table
Soprano Saxophone
Alto Saxophone
Tenor Saxophone
Baritone Saxophone
Oboe
English Horn
Basson
Clarinet
Piccolo
Flute
Recorder
Pan Flute
Bottle Blow
Shakuhachi
Whistle
Ocarina
Square
Sawtooth
Calliope
Chiffer
Charang
Solo Vox
Fifths
Bass Lead
Fantasia
Warm Pad
Poly Synth
Space Vox
Bow Glass
Metal Pad
Halo Pad
Sweep Pad
Ice Rain
Sound Track
Crystal
Atmosphere
Brightness
Goblin
Echo Drop
Star Theme
Sitar
Banjo
Shamishen
Koto
Kalimba
Bagpipe
Fiddle
Shanai
Tinkle Bell
Agogo
Steel Drum
Wood Block
Taiko
Melody Tom
Synth Drum
Reversed Cymbal
Guitar Noise
Breath Noise
Sea Shore
Birds
Telephone
Helicopter
Applause
Gunshot
Piano1
Piano2
Piano3
Honky Tonk
Electric Piano 1
Electric Piano 2
Harpsichord
Clavinet
Celesta
Glockenspiel
Music Box
Vibraphone
Marimba
Xylophone
Tubular Bell
Dulcimer
Electric Organ
Jazz Organ
Rock Organ
Pipe Organ
Reed Organ
Accordion
Harmonica
Bandonion
Nylon Guitar
Steel Guitar
Jazz Guitar
Clean Guitar
Muted Guitar
Drive Guitar
Lead Guitar
Harmonic Guitar
Acoustic Bass
Finger Bass
Pick Bass
Fretless Bass
Slap Bass1
Slap Bass2
Synth Bass1
Synth Bass2
Violin
Viola
Cello
Contra Bass
Tremolo Strings
Pizzicato Strings
Harp
Timpani
Strings
Slow Strings
Synth Strings1
Synth Strings 2
Choir Aahs
Voice Oohs
Synth Voice
Orchestra Hit
Trumpet
Trombone
Tuba
Muted Trumpet
French Horn
Brass Section
Synth Brass1
Synth Brass2
46
General MIDI Voice & Drum Table
27 - D#2
28 - E2
29 - F2
30 - F#2
31 - G2
32 - G#2
33 - A2
34 - A#2
35 - B2
36 - C3
37 - C#3
38 - D3
39 - D#3
40 - E3
41 - F3
42 - F#3
43 - G3
44 - G#3
45 - A3
46 - A#3
47 - B3
48 - C4
49 - C#4
50 - D4
51 - D#4
52 - E4
53 - F4
54 - F#4
55 - G4
56 - G#4
57 - A4
58 - A#4
59 - B4
60 - C5
61 - C#5
62 - D5
63 - D#5
64 - E5
65 - F5
66 - F#5
67 - G5
68 - G#5
69 - A5
70 - A#5
71 - B5
72 - C6
73 - C#6
74 - D6
75 - D#6
76 - E6
77 - F6
78 - F#6
79 - G6
80 - G#6
81 - A6
82 - A#6
83 - B7
84 - C8
85 - C#8
86 - D8
87 - D#8
88 - E8
Prog 1
Standard Drum
High Q
Slap
Scratch Push
Scratch Pull
Sticks
Square Click
Metronome Click
Metronome Bell
Kick drum2/Jazz BD2
Kick drum1/Jazz BD1
Side Stick
Snare Drum1
Hand Clap
Snare Drum 2
Low Floor Tom
Closed Hi Hat [EXC1]
High Floor Tom
Pedal Hi-Hat [EXC1]
Low Tom
Open Hi-Hat [EXC1]
Low-Mid Tom
Hi Mid Tom
Crash Cymbal 1
High Tom
Ride Cymbal 1
Chinese Cymbal
Ride Bell
Tambourine
Splash Cymbal
Cowbell
Crash Cymbal2
Vibraslap
Ride Cymbal2
Hi Bongo
Low Bongo
Mute Hi Conga
Open Hi Conga
Low Conga
High Timbale
Low Timbale
High Timbale
Low Agogo
Cabasa
Maracas
Short Whistle[EXC2]
Long Whistle[EXC2]
Short Guiro[EXC3]
Long Guiro[EXC3]
Claves
Hi Wood Block
Low Wood Block
Mute Cuica[EXC4]
Open Cuica[EXC4]
Mute Triangle[EXC5]
Open Triangle[EXC5]
Shaker
Jingle Bell
Belltree
Castanets
Mute Surdo[EXC6]
Open Surdo[EXC6]
Prog 9
Room Drum
Prog 17
Power Drum
Prog 25
Elec. Drum
Prog 26
TR-808
Power Kick
Elec BD
Gated Snare
Elec SD
808 Bass Drum
808 Rim shot
808 Snare Drum
Room Low Tom2
Room Low Tom2
Elec Low Tom2
Room Low Tom1
Room Low Tom1
Elec Low Tom1
Room Mid Tom2
Room Mid Tom2
Elec Mid Tom2
Room Mid Tom1
Room Hi Tom2
Room Mid Tom1
Room Hi Tom2
Elec Mid Tom1
Elec Hi Tom2
Room Hi Tom1
Room Hi Tom1
Elec Hi Tom1
808 Low Tom2
808 CHH[EXC1]
808 Low Tom2
808 CHH[EXC1]
808 Mid Tom2
808 OHH[EXC1]
808 Mid Tom1
808 Hi Tom2
808 Cymbal
808 Hi Tom1
Reverse Cymbal
808 Cowbell
808 High Conga
808 Mid Conga
808 Low Conga
808 Maracas
808 Claves
47
General MIDI Voice & Drum Table
#
27 - D#1
28 - E1
29 - F1
30 - F#1
31 - G1
32 - G#1
33 - A1
34 - A#1
35 - B1
36 - C2
37 - C#2
38 - D2
39 - D#2
40 - E2
41 - F2
42 - F#2
43 - G2
44 - G#2
45 - A2
46 - A#2
47 - B2
48 - C3
49 - C#3
50 - D3
51 - D#3
52 - E3
53 - F3
54 - F#3
55 - G3
56 - G#3
57 - A3
58 - A#3
59 - B3
60 - C4
61 - C#4
62 - D4
63 - D#4
64 - E4
65 - F4
66 - F#4
67 - G4
68 - G#4
69 - A4
70 - A#4
71 - B4
72 - C5
73 - C#5
74 - D5
75 - D#5
76 - E5
77 - F5
78 - F#5
79 - G5
80 - G#5
81 - A5
82 - A#5
83 - B5
84 - C6
85 - C#6
86 - D6
87 - D#6
88 - E6
Prog 33
Jazz Drum
Prog 41
Brush Drum
Prog 49
Orchestra
Closed Hi Hat
Pedal Hi-Hat
Open Hi Hat
Ride Cymbal
Jazz BD2
Jazz BD1
Jazz BD2
Jazz BD1
Concert BD 2
Concert BD1
Brush Tap
Brush Slap
Brush Swirl
Concert SD
Castanets
Concert SD
Timpani F
Timpani F#
Timpani G
Timpani G#
Timpani A
Timpani A#
Timpani B
Timpani c
Timpani c#
Timpani d
Timpani d#
Timpani e
Timpani f
Prog 57
SFX 1
Concert Cymbal2
Concert Cymbal1
48
High Q
Slap
Scratch Push
Scratch Pull
Sticks
Square Click
Metronome Click
Metronome Bell
Guitar Slide
Gt Cut Noise(dw)
Gt Cut Noise (up)
Double Bass Slap
Key Click
Laughing
Screaming
Punch
Heart Beat
Footsteps1
Footsteps2
Applause
Door Creaking
Door Closing
Scratch
Wind Chime
Car Engine Start
Car Breaking
Car Pass
Car Crash
Police Siren
Train
Jet Take-off
Helicopter
Starship
Gun Shot
Machine gun
Laser gun
Explosion
Dog
Horse Gallop
Birds
Rain
Thunder
Wind
Sea Shore
Stream
Bubble
REMARKS
MIDI Implementation Chart
MIDI
Implementation Chart
MIDI
Implementierung
Function
Recognized
Transmitted
Basic Channel
Default
ALL
1 -3
Mode
Default
OMNI OFF, POLY
OMNI OFF, POLY
Note ON/OFF
9nH kk vv
O
O
Remark
#kk:note ON (0-127)
#vv:velocity (1-127)
Pitch Bender
EnH bi bh
O
O
Maximum swing +/- 1 tone
00
BnH 00H cc
O
X
Bank Select
01
BnH 01H cc
O
X
Modulation Wheel
05
BnH 05H cc
O
X
Portamento Time
06
BnH 06H cc
O
X
Data Entry
07
BnH 07H cc
O
X
Volume
10
BnH 0AH cc
O
X
Pan Out
11
BnH 0BH cc
O
X
Expression
64
BnH 40H cc
O
O
Sustain (Damper) Pedal
65
BnH 41H cc
O
X
Portamento ON/OFF
66
BnH 42H cc
O
O
Sostenuto Pedal
Control
67
BnH 43H cc
O
O
Soft Pedal
Change
80
BnH 80H vv
O
X
Reverb Prog.(vv=00H-70H)
81
BnH 51H vv
O
X
Chorus Prog.
91
BnH 5BH vv
O
O
Reverb Send Level
93
BnH 5DH vv
O
O
Chorus Send Level
120
BnH 78H 00H
O
X
All Sound Off
121
BnH 79H 00H
O
X
Reset All Controller
123
BnH 7BH 00H
O
X
All Notes Off
126
BnH 7EH 00H
O
X
Mono On
127
BnH 7FH 00H
O
X
Poly On
CnH PP
O
O
Sounds/Drum Set List
General MIDI
X
X
Program
Change
System
Exclusive
Reset
O : Yes, X : No
49
VP Music Library
VP-Songs
VP Music Library
CLASSIC 01 - CHOPIN
GROUP NAME Clssic01
Display
CH001
CH002
CH003
CH004
CH005
CH006
CH007
CH008
CH009
CH010
CH011
CH012
CH013
CH014
CH015
CH016
CH017
CH018
CH019
CH020
CH021
CH022
CH023
CH024
CH025
CH026
CH027
CH028
CH029
CH030
CH031
CH032
CH033
CH034
CH035
CH036
CH037
CH038
CH039
CH040
CH041
CH042
CH043
CH044
CH045
CH046
CH047
CH048
CH049
CH050
Title
Composer
Etude op.10 no.1
Etude op.10 no.2
Etude op.10 no.4
Etude op.10 no.5
Etude op.10 no.6
Etude op.10 no.7
Etude op.10 no.8
Etude op.10 no.9
Etude op.10 no.10
Etude op.10 no.11
Etude op.10 no.12
Etude op.25 no.1
Etude op.25 no.2
Etude op.25 no.3
Etude op.25 no.4
Etude op.25 no.5
Etude op.25 no.6
Etude op.25 no.7
Etude op.25 no.8
Etude op.25 no.9
Etude op.25 no.10
Etude op.25 no.11
Nocturne op.9 no.1
Nocturne op.9 no.2
Nocturne op.15 no.2
Nocturne op.27 no.2
Nocturne op.32 no.1
Nocturne op.37 no.1
Nocturne op.37 no.2
Nocturne op.48 no.1
Nocturne op.55 no.1
Nocturne op.62 no.2
Nocturne op.72 no.1
Sonata op.3 no.3
Sonata op.3 no.4
Mazurka op.6 no.1
Mazurka op.6 no.2
Mazurka op.6 no.3
Mazurka op.6 no.4
Mazurka op.7 no.1
Mazurka op.7 no.2
Mazurka op.7 no.3
Mazurka op.7 no.4
Mazurka op.7 no.5
Mazurka op.17 no.1
Mazurka op.17 no.2
Mazurka op.17 no.3
Mazurka op.17 no.4
Mazurka op.24 no.1
Mazurka op.24 no.2
Chopin, Fryderk
Francuszek
50
VP Music Library
CLASSIC 02 - Chopin
GROUP NAME Clssic02
Display
CH051
CH052
CH053
CH054
CH055
CH056
CH057
CH058
CH059
CH060
CH061
CH062
CH063
CH064
CH065
CH066
CH067
CH068
CH069
CH070
CH071
CH072
CH073
CH074
CH075
CH076
CH077
CH078
CH079
CH080
CH081
CH082
CH083
CH084
CH085
CH086
CH087
CH088
CH089
CH090
CH091
CH092
CH093
CH094
CH095
CH096
CH097
CH098
CH099
CH100
Title
Composer
Mazurka op.24 no.3
Mazurka op.24 no.4
Mazurka op.30 no.1
Mazurka op.30 no.2
Mazurka op.30 no.3
Mazurka op.30 no.4
Mazurka op.33 no.1
Mazurka op.33 no.2
Mazurka op.33 no.3
Mazurka op.33 no.4
Mazurka op.41 no.1
Mazurka op.41 no.2
Mazurka op.41 no.3
Mazurka op.41 no.4
Mazurka op.50 no.1
Mazurka op.50 no.2
Mazurka op.50 no.3
Mazurka op.56 no.1
Mazurka op.56 no.2
Mazurka op.56 no.3
Mazurka op.59 no.1
Mazurka op.59 no.2
Mazurka op.59 no.3
Mazurka op.63 no.1
Mazurka op.63 no.2
Mazurka op.63 no.3
Mazurka op.67 no.1
Mazurka op.67 no.2
Mazurka op.67 no.3
Mazurka op.67 no.4
Mazurka op.68 no.1
Mazurka op.68 no.2
Mazurka op.68 no.3
Mazurka op.68 no.4
Polonaise op.41 no.1
Trois Nouvelles Etude No.1
Scherzo no.1
Scherzo no.2
Scherzo no.3
Waltz op.34 no.1
Waltz op.34 no.2
Waltz op.64 no.1
Waltz op.64 no.2
Waltz op.64 no.3
Waltz op.69 no.2
Waltz op.70 no.2
Waltz op.56
Impromptu - No. 4 c sharp minor
(Fantasie-Impromptu) Op.66
Ballade no. 1 in g minor op.23
Ballade no.2 in F Major, op.38
51
Chopin, Fryderk
Francuszek
VP Music Library
CLASSIC 03 - Chopin and Brahms
GROUP NAME Clssic03
Display
CH101
CH102
CH103
CH104
CH105
CH106
CH107
CH108
CH109
CH110
CH111
CH112
CH113
CH114
CH115
CH116
CH117
CH118
CH119
CH120
CH121
CH122
CH123
CH124
CH125
CH126
BR01
BR02
BR03
BR04
BR05
BR06
BR07
BR08
Title
Composer
Ballade no.3 in A flat Major, op.47
Ballade no.4 in f minor, op.52
Prelude op.28 no.1 in C Major- Agitato
Prelude no.28 no.2 in a minor- Lento
Prelude op.28 no.3 in G Major- Vivace
Prelude op.28 no.4 in e minor- Largo
Prelude op.28 no.5 in D Major- Molto allegro
Prelude op.28 no.6 in b minor- Assai lento
Prelude op.28 no.7 in A Major- Andantino
Prelude op.28 no.8 in f-sharp minor- Molto agitato
Prelude op.28 no.9 in E Major- Largo
Prelude op.28 no.10 in c-sharp minor- Molto allegro
Prelude op.28 no.11 in B Major- Vivace
Prelude op.28 no.12 in g-sharp minor- Presto
Prelude op.28 no.13 in F-sharp Major- Lento
Prelude op.28 no.14 in e-flat minor- Allegro
Prelude op.28 no.15 in D-flat Major- Sostenuto
Prelude op.28 no.16 in b-flat minor- Presto con fuoco
Prelude op.28 no.17 in A-flat Major- Allegretto
Prelude op.28 no.18 in f minor- Molto allegro
Prelude op.28 no.19 in E-flat Major- Vivace
Prelude op.28 no.20 in c minor- Largo
Prelude op.28 no.21 in B-flat Major- Cantabile
Prelude op.28 no.22 in g minor- Molto agitato
Prelude op.28 no.23 in F Major- Moderato
Prelude op.28 no.24 in d minor- Allegro appassionato
Ballade in D major, op.10 no.2
Capriccio in b minor, op.76 no.2
Hungarian Dance no.5 in f sharp mino
Waltzes no.2 in E major
Waltzes no.5 in E major
Waltzes no.6 in C sharp major
Hungarian Dance no.9 in e minor
Waltzes in A flat major, op.39 no.15
52
Chopin, Fryderk
Francuszek
Brahms, Johannes
VP Music Library
CLASSIC 04 - Mozart and Others
GROUP NAME Clssic04
Display
M01
M02
M03
M04
M05
M06
M07
M08
M09
M10
M11
M12
M13
M14
M15
M16
M17
M18
M19
M20
M21
M22
M23
M24
M25
M26
M27
M28
M29
M30
M31
M32
M33
Title
Composer
Piano Sonata no.9 in a minor, KV310
K310-1 (Allegro maestoso)
K310-2 (Andante cantabile con espressione)
K310-3 (Presto)
Piano Sonata no.10 in C major, KV330
K330-1 (Allegro moderato)
K330-2 (Andante cantabile)
K330-3 (Allegretto)
Piano Sonata no.11 in A major, KV331
K331-1 (Andante grazioso, con variazioni)
K331-2 (Minuetto)
K331-3 (Alla turca : Allegretto)
Piano Sonata no.12 in A major, KV332
K332-1 (Allegro)
K332-2 (Adagio)
K332-3 (Allegro assai)
Piano Sonata no.13 in B flat major, KV333
K333-1 (Allegro)
K333-2 (Andante cantabile)
K333-3 (Allegretto grazioso)
Piano Sonata no.14 in c minor, KV457
K457-1 (Allegro)
K457-2 (Adagio)
K457-3 (Molto allegro)
Piano Sonata no.16 in C major, KV545
K545-1 (Allegro)
K545-2 (Andante)
K545-3 (Rondo : Allegro)
Piano Sonata no.18 in B flat major, KV570
K570-1 (Allegro)
K570-2 (Adagio)
K570-3 (Allegretto)
Piano Sonata no.19 in D major, KV576
K576-1 (Allegro)
K576-2 (Adagio)
K576-3 (Allegretto)
BE04
BE05
BE06
BE07
BE08
Fantasia no.3 in d minor, KV397
Fantasia no.4 in c minor, KV475
Variations "Ah! Vous dirai-je, Maman"
Pastorale variee
Romance in A flat major
Rondo in D major, KV485
Sonate no.8 in c minor, op.13 'Pathetique'
Grave - Allegro molto e con brio
Adagio cantabile
Rondo - Allegro
Sonate no.14 in c sharp minor, op.27 no.2 'Moonlight'
Adagio sostenuto
Allegretto
Presto con fuoco
Country Dance no. 1
Rondo a capriccio, op. 129
H01
H02
"The harmonious Blacksmith"
Largo, piano (transcription by other composers)
BE01
BE02
BE03
53
Mozart, Wolfgang
Amadeus
Beethoven, Ludwig
van
Handel, Friedrich
Georg
VP Music Library
CLASSIC 05 - Debussy and Others
GROUP NAME Clssic05
Display
D01
D02
D03
D04
D05
D06
D07
Title
Composer
Debussy, Claude
Achille
D10
D11
D12
D13
D14
D15
D16
D17
D18
D19
D20
D21
D22
D23
D24
D25
D26
D27
D28
D29
Jardins sous la pluie
Arabesque No.1 in E major
Golliwog's CakeWalk
Images, 1er Livre 1. Reflets dans l'eau
Images, 1er Livre 2. Hommage a Rameau
Images, 1er Livre 3. Mouvement
Preludes (1er Livre)
[selection] Prelude VI (Des pas sur la neige)
Preludes (1er Livre)
[selection] Prelude VIII (La fille aux cheveux de lin)
Preludes (1er Livre)
[selection] Prelude X (La cathedrale engloutie)
Suite bergamesque 1. Prelude
Suite bergamesque 2. Menuet
Suite bergamesque 3. Clair de lune
Suite bergamesque 4. Passepied
Pour le piano 1. Prelude
Pour le piano 2. Sarabande
Pour le piano 3. Toccata
Pour le piano(II) 1. L'isle joyeuse
Pour le piano(II) 2. Masque
Pour le piano(II) 3. La plus que lente
Little pieces 1. Ballade
Little pieces 2. Nocturne
Little pieces 3. Reverie
Little pieces 4. Dance
Petite Suite, for piano 4-hands 1. En Bateau
Petite Suite, for piano 4-hands 2. Cortege
Petite Suite, for piano 4-hands 3. Menuet
Petite Suite, for piano 4-hands 4. Ballet
"The Afternoon of a Fawn" for piano 4-hands
Children's Corner
F01
F02
F03
F04
F05
F06
F07
F08
HIN01
HIN02
HIN03
HIN04
HIN05
HIN06
HIN07
HIN08
HIN09
HIN10
HIN11
HIN12
"Romance sans paroles", in A flat major, op.17 no.1
Barcarolle op.26
Dolly Suite, op.56 - Berceuse
Dolly Suite, op.56 - Mi-a-ou
Dolly Suite, op.56 - Jardin de Dolly
Dolly Suite, op.56 - Kitty Valse
Dolly Suite, op.56 - Tendresse
Dolly Suite, op.56 - Le Pas Espagnole
Massig schnell
Ruhig bewegt
Munter. Schnelle Viertel
Lebhaft, sehr markiert
Schnell. Ganze Takte
Gemachlich
Schnell und wild
Massig schnell
Langsam, ruhig schreitend
Munter, ziemlich lebhaft
Massig schnell
Bewegt
Faure, Gabriel
DV01
Humoresque in G flat major, op.101 no.7
D08
D09
54
Hindemith, Paul
Dvorak, Antonin
VP Music Library
CLASSIC 06 - Schumann and Others
GROUP NAME Clssic06
Display
Title
Composer
SCHU01
Papillon op.2 no.1, Widmung
Scenes from Childhood op.15
From foreign lands and peoples in G major
Blind man's bluff in b min d in D major
Pleasing child in D major
An importan event in A major
Dreaming or Reverie in F major
Knight of the hobbyhorse in C major
Child falling asleep in e minor
The poet speaks in G major
Kreisleriana, op.16 no.7
Klavier in Fughettenform, op.126
Nicht schnell, leise vurzutrgen
Ziemlich langsam, empfindungsvoll vorzutragen
16.Erster Verlust
Etudes 6. In Waltz form
Il bacio (The swan)
My heart at thy .sweet voice
Asturias
Iberia, Book 1 (1907)
1. Evocacion
2. El Puerto
Venetianisches Gondellied, op.19 no.6
Venetianisches Gondellied, op.30 no.6
Duet in A flat major, op.38 no.6
Venetianisches Gondellied, op.62 no.5
Spring song / Frulingslied, op.62 no.6
Spinning song / Spinnerlied, op.67 no.4
Lost illusions in f sharp minor
Rondo Capriccioso in E major op.14
Scherzo in b minor op.16 no.2
Variations serieuses, for piano in d minor, op.54
Auf Flugeln des Gesanges
Schumann, Robert
Alexander
SCHU02
SCHU03
SCHU04
SCHU05
SCHU06
SCHU07
SCHU08
SCHU09
SCHU10
SCHU11
SCHU12
SCHU13
SS01
SS02
SS03
ALBEN01
ALBEN02
ALBEN03
MEN01
MEN02
MEN03
MEN04
MEN05
MEN06
MEN07
MEN08
MEN09
MEN10
MEN11
RA01
RA02
RA03
RA04
RA05
RA06
RA07
RA08
RA09
RA10
RA11
RA12
RA13
RA14
RA15
RA16
RA17
RA18
RA19
Miroirs
Noctuelles
Oiseaux tristes
Le Tombeau de Couperin, Suite
Prelude
Fugue
Forlane
Rigaudon
Menuet
Toccata
Pavane pour une infante defunte
Menuet sur le nom d'Haydn
A la maniere de Borodin
A la maniere de Emmanuel Chabrier
Prelude
Ma mere L'oye, Suite
Pavane de la Belle au bois dormant
Petit Poucet
Laideronnette, Imperatrice des Pagodes
Le jardin feerique
Jeux d'eau
Menuet antique
55
Saint-Saens, Camille
Albeniz, Isaac
Manuel Francisco
Mendelssohn Bartholdy, Felix
Ravel, Maurice
Joseph
VP Music Library
CLASSIC 07 - Haydn and Others
GROUP NAME Clssic07
Display
Title
Composer
ANON01
Fuga g-moll
Piano Sonata Op.7 No.3
1. Allegro con spirito
2. Cantabile e lento
3. Presto
Piano Sonata Op.12 No.2 in Eb Major
1. Presto
2. Largo
3. Assai allegro
Piano Sonata Op.26 No.3 in D Major
1. Presto
2. Un poco andante
3. Assai allegro
Piano Sonata Op.24 No.2 in F Major
1. Allegro con spirito
2. Adagio
3. Rondo - Allegretto con spirito
The little Windmills
Spinnerlie op14-4
The Fair, Op. 101, No. 8
Andante with Variations in f minor, Hob. XVII6 (1793)
Andante with Variations in f minor
Trio
Variation I
Variation II
Finale
Die Muhle
12 Etudes d'execution transcendante (Transcendental Etudes), S 139
Etude Transcendante in d minor, Mazeppa
Une Larme
The flight of the bumble bee (by S. Rachmaninov)
TROIS GYMNOPEDIE
SATIE01 Gymnopedie 1ere
SATIE02 Gymnopedie 2eme
TROIS GNOSSIENNES
SATIE03 Gnossienne 1ere
SATIE04 Gnossienne 3eme
- Harpsichord music 12 Fantasie per clavicembalo (TWV 33)
TELEM01 1. Fantasia
TELEM02 2. Fantasia
TELEM03 3. Fantasia
TELEM04 4. Fantasia
TELEM05 5. Fantasia
TELEM06 6. Fantasia
TELEM07 7. Fantasia
TELEM08 8. Fantasia
TELEM09 9. Fantasia
TELEM10 10. Fantasia
TELEM11 11. Fantasia
TELEM12 12. Fantasia
Anonymous
Clementi, Muzio
CLE01
CLE02
CLE03
CLE04
CLE05
CLE06
CLE07
CLE08
CLE09
CLE10
CLE11
CLE12
COUP01
ELMEN01
GURLI01
HAYD01
HAYD02
HAYD03
HAYD04
HAYD05
JEN01
LIST01
MUSS01
RIM01
SATIE01
SATIE02
SATIE03
SATIE04
TELEM01
TELEM02
TELEM03
TELEM04
TELEM05
TELEM06
TELEM07
TELEM08
TELEM09
TELEM10
TELEM11
TELEM12
TCHAI01
TCHAI02
TCHAI03
4. Mama
13.Kamarinskaya
16.Old French Air
Couperin, Francois
Ellmenreich, Albert
Gurlitt, Cornelius
Haydn, Franz Joseph
Jensen A.
Liszt, Franz
Mussorgsky, Modest
Rimsky, Korsakov
Satie, Erik
Telemann, Georq
Philipp
Tchaikovsky, Peter
Ilich
56
VP Music Library
CLASSIC 08 - Bach
GROUP NAME Clssic08
Display
BA1-01
BA1-02
BA1-03
BA1-04
BA1-05
BA1-06
BA1-07
BA1-08
BA1-09
BA1-10
BA1-11
BA1-12
BA1-13
BA1-14
BA1-15
BA1-16
BA1-17
BA1-18
BA1-19
BA1-20
BA1-21
BA1-22
BA1-23
BA1-24
BA1-25
BA1-26
BA1-27
BA1-28
BA1-29
BA1-30
BA1-31
BA1-32
BA1-33
BA1-34
BA1-35
BA1-36
BA1-37
BA1-38
BA1-39
BA1-40
BA1-41
BA1-42
BA1-43
BA1-44
BA1-45
BA1-46
BA1-47
BA1-48
Title
Composer
-Harpsichord or Clavichord worksPreambulum in C major, BWV924
Preambulum in D major, BWV925
Prelude in d minor, BWV926
Preambulum in F major, BWV927
Prelude in F major, BWV928
Trio Prelude in g minor, BWV929
Preambulum in g minor, BWV930
Prelude in C major, BWV933
Prelude in c minor, BWV934
Prelude in d minor, BWV935
Prelude in D major, BWV936
Prelude in E major, BWV937
Prelude in e minor, BWV938
Prelude in C major, BWV939
Prelude in d minor, BWV940
Prelude in e minor, BWV941
Prelude in a minor, BWV942
Prelude in C major, BWV943
¡ØTwo-Voice Inventions¡Ø
Invention in C major, BWV772
Invention in c minor, BWV773 [Canon]
Invention in D major, BWV774
Invention in d minor, BWV775
Invention in E flat major, BWV776
Invention in E major, BWV777
Invention in e minor, BWV778
Invention in F major, BWV779
Invention in f minor, BWV780
Invention in G major, BWV781 [Fugue]
Invention in g minor, BWV782 [Double-Fugue]
Invention in A major, BWV783
Invention in a minor, BWV784
Invention in B flat major, BWV785
Invention in h minor, BWV786 [Fugue]
¡ØThree-Voice Sinfonias¡Ø
Sinfonia in C major, BWV 787 [Fugue]
Sinfonia in c minor, BWV 788 [Fugue]
Sinfonia in D major, BWV 789 [Fugue]
Sinfonia in d minor, BWV 790 [Fugue]
Sinfonia in E flat major, BWV 791 [Two parts Fugue]
Sinfonia in E major, BWV792 [Fugue]
Sinfonia in e minor, BWV793 [Fugue]
Sinfonia in F major, BWV794 [Fugue]
Sinfonia in f minor, BWV795 [Triple-Fugue]
Sinfonia in G major, BWV796 [Fugue]
Sinfonia in g minor, BWV797 [Fugue]
Sinfonia in A major, BWV798 [Fugue]
Sinfonia in a minor, BWV799 [Fugue]
Sinfonia in B flat major, BWV800 [Fugue]
Sinfonia in h minor, BWV801 [Two voice]
57
Bach, Johann
Sebastian
VP Music Library
CLASSIC 09 - Bach
GROUP NAME Clssic09
Display
Title
Composer
BA2-01
BA2-02
BA2-03
BA2-04
-Harpsichord or Clavichord works(Four Duettos) Duettos from 'Clavier Ubung' III
Duette I in e minor, BWV802
Duette II in F major, BWV803
Duette III in G major, BWV804
Duette IV in a minor, BWV805
BA2-05
BA2-06
BA2-07
BA2-08
BA2-09
BA2-10
BA2-11
- English Suites (from BWV 806 to BWV 811)
Suite in A major, BWV 806
I. Prelude
II. Allemande
III. Courante
IV. Courante II - Double I & II
V. Sarabande
VI. Bourree I & II
VII. Gigue
BA2-12
BA2-13
BA2-14
BA2-15
BA2-16
BA2-17
Suite in a minor, BWV 807
I. Prelude
II. Allemande
III. Courante
IV. Sarabande
V. Bourree I & II
VI. Gigue
BA2-18
BA2-19
BA2-20
BA2-21
BA2-22
BA2-23
Suite in g minor, BWV 808
I. Prelude
II. Allemande
III. Courante
IV. Sarabande
V. Gavotte
VI. Gigue
BA2-24
BA2-25
BA2-26
BA2-27
BA2-28
BA2-29
BA2-30
Suite in F Major, BWV 809
I. Prelude
II. Allemande
III. Courante
IV. Sarabande
V. Menuett I
VI. Menuett II
VII. Gigue
BA2-31
BA2-32
BA2-33
BA2-34
BA2-35
BA2-36
BA2-37
Suite in e minor, BWV 810
I. Prelude
II. Allemande
III. Courtante
IV. Sarabande
V. Passepied I
VI. Passepied I Da Capo
VII. Gigue
BA2-38
BA2-39
BA2-40
BA2-41
BA2-42
BA2-43
Suite in d minor, BWV 811
I. Prelude
II. Allemande
III. Courante
IV. Sarabande
V. Gavotte I & II
VI. Gigue
58
Bach, Johann
Sebastian
VP Music Library
CLASSIC 10 - Bach
GROUP NAME Clssic10
Display
Title
Composer
BA3-01
BA3-02
BA3-03
BA3-04
BA3-05
BA3-06
-Harpsichord or Clavichord works- French Suites
Suite in c minor, BWV 813
I. Allemande
II. Courante
III. Sarabande
IV. Menuett I
V. Menuett II
VI. Gigue
BA3-07
BA3-08
BA3-09
BA3-10
BA3-11
BA3-12
Suite in h minor, BWV 814
I. Allemande
II. Courante
III. Sarabande
IV. Menuett - Trio
V. Anglaise
VI. Gigue
BA3-13
BA3-14
BA3-15
BA3-16
BA3-17
BA3-18
BA3-19
Suite in E flat major, BWV 815
I. Allemande
II. Courante
III. Sarabande
IV. Menuett
V. Gavotte
VI. Air
VII. Gigue
BA3-20
BA3-21
BA3-22
BA3-23
BA3-24
BA3-25
BA3-26
BA3-27
Suite in E major, BWV 817
I. Allemande
II. Courante
III. Sarabande
IV. Gavotte
V. Polonaise
VI. Menuett
VII. Bourre
VIII. Gigue
BA3-28
-Pipe OrganPraludium und Fuge in B BWV560
BA3-29
BA3-30
BA3-31
-Harpsichord or Clavichord works(Separated pieces of Suites)
Allemanda, BWV835
Minuetto in G major, BWV841
Scherzo, BWV844
BA3-32
BA3-33
BA3-34
BA3-35
(Clavierbuchlein II fur Anna Magdalena)
Polonese in d minor
Solo per il Cembalo in E flat major
Polonese in G major
Minuetto in d minor
BA3-36
Fantasia in c minor, BWV919
BA3-37
BA3-38
BA3-39
BA3-40
-Piano works15 Symphonien 1
15 Symphonien 6
Wohltemperriertes Klavier-Pledudio 1
Wohltemperriertes Klavier-Fugal
59
Bach, Johann
Sebastian
VP Music Library
JAZZ 01 - Ensemble
GROUP NAME JAZZ01
Display
JE0001
JE0002
JE0003
JE0004
JE0005
JE0006
JE0007
JE0008
JE0009
JE0010
JE0011
JE0012
JE0013
JE0014
JE0015
JE0016
JE0017
JE0018
JE0019
JE0020
JE0021
JE0022
JE0023
JE0024
JE0025
JE0026
JE0027
JE0028
JE0029
JE0030
JE0031
JE0032
JE0033
JE0034
JE0035
JE0036
JE0037
JE0038
JE0039
JE0040
JE0041
JE0042
JE0043
JE0044
JE0045
JE0046
JE0047
JE0048
JE0049
JE0050
Title/Artist
Blues in C - Fuller, L
Good Bait - Damer.,Basie
Love walked in - Gershwin
In a mellowtone - Duke Ellington
Satin doll - Duke Ellington
It don't mean a thing - Duke Ellington
Take Five
Carnival - Banfa, L.
Someday my prince will come - Churchill
Blues in F - Ganon, O
Falling for you - Ganon, O
So nice - Ganon, O
I said it before - Ganon, O
Night Breeze - Ganon, O
Cherokee (Miles Black ver.) - Noble Ray
The Rose - McBroom, A.
The shadow of your smile - Mandel, J.
Days of wine and roses - Mancini
Come rain or come shine - Mercer, Arlen
Wind Beneath my wings - Henley,Silb.
Old Devil Moon - Harb.,Lane
Easy to Love - Porter, Cole
I Concentrate on You - Porter, Cole
I Get a Kick out of you - Porter, Cole
I Love You (Accompaniment) - Porter, Cole
Night and Day - Porter, Cole
You'd be so nice to come home to - Porter, Cole
Easy Living - Rainger
Falling in Love with Love - Rodgers/Hart
Have you met miss Jones - Rodgers/Hart
I didn't know what time it was (Accompaniment) - Rodgers/Hart
I didn't know what time it was - Rodgers/Hart
My funny Valentine (Accompaniment) - Rodgers/Hart
When your lover has gone - Swan, E.A.
There is no greater love - Symes/Jones
Here's That Rainy Day (Larry Fuller Version) - Van Heusen
Polka Dots and Moonbeams (Accomp. Version) - Van Heusen
The More I see you (Accompaniment) - Warren, H.
September in the Rain (Accompaniment) - Warren/Dubin
I want to be Happy - Youm./Caesar
Abstraction Blue [For Georgia O'Keeffe] - Renee Rosnes
50's Cha-cha - Rebeca Mauleon-Santana
Afternoon in Carmel - Miles Black
The Low Road - Brad Turner
Pieces of Sky - Miles Black
Pastels - Ron Johnston
Caller #9 - Brad Turner
Lexicon - Renee Rosnes
Little P.A. - Brad Turner
Moderno Blues - Miles Black
60
VP Music Library
JAZZ 02 - Ensemble
GROUP NAME JAZZ02
Display
JE0051
JE0052
JE0053
JE0054
JE0055
JE0056
JE0057
JE0058
JE0059
JE0060
JE0061
JE0062
JE0063
JE0064
JE0065
JE0066
JE0067
JE0068
JE0069
JE0070
JE0071
JE0072
JE0073
JE0074
JE0075
JE0076
JE0077
JE0078
JE0079
JE0080
JE0081
JE0082
JE0083
JE0084
JE0085
JE0086
JE0087
JE0088
JE0089
JE0090
JE0091
JE0092
JE0093
JE0094
JE0095
JE0096
JE0097
JE0098
JE0099
JE0100
Title/Artist
Devonitely - Ron Johnston
Devon's Delight - Ron Johnston
Dublin - Ron Johnston
Filomena - Ron Johnston
Flying Duck - Miles Black
For the Moment - Renee Rosnes
Gift of Love - Ron Johnston
Girlie's World - Renee Rosnes
Gotham - Brad Turner
I.A. Blues - Renee Rosnes
Lifewish - Renee Rosnes
Lookout - Miles Black
Mizmahta - Renee Rosnes
One For Walton - Renee Rosnes
One Look - Brad Turner
Pale Moon - Miles Black
One World - Renee Rosnes
Orion's Belt - Renee Rosnes
Robin - Ron Johnston
Roxy - Brad Turner
Sixth Sense - Ron Johnston
Snakes & Ladders - Miles Black
Something Like - Miles Black
Song for PJ - Miles Black
Summerset - Miles Black
The Gift - Renee Rosnes
The Land of Five Rivers - Renee Rosnes
A Foggy Day
Cloudy Day Blues - Miles Black
Cafe in Paris - Miles Black
Flippin' and a Flyin - Miles Black
Gone With the Dawn - Miles Black
Good Cookin' - Miles Black
Gypsy Blues - Miles Black
A Noro - Son Traditi
Afro-Cuban Mood - Rebeca Mauleon-Santana
Lazy Evening Blues - Miles Black
Rockin' My Soul - Miles Black
Solo T U - Bolero
Mambo for One - Mambo Latin
Peruchineando - Son Traditi
Batucada Pra Voce - Batucada
Batu-Salsa - Batucada
Blue Cha-cha - Cha-cha-ch
Bomb tico - Bomba
Bossa Me - Bossa Nova
Afro a Cuatro - Rebeca Mauleon Santana
Baila Rumberita - Rebeca Mauleon-Santana
Bata-Montuno - Mambo Latin
Cafe Ole - Mambo Latin
61
VP Music Library
JAZZ 03 - Ensemble
GROUP NAME JAZZ03
Display
JE0101
JE0102
JE0103
JE0104
JE0105
JE0106
JE0107
JE0108
JE0109
JE0110
JE0111
JE0112
JE0113
JE0114
JE0115
JE0116
JE0117
JE0118
JE0119
JE0120
JE0121
JE0122
JE0123
JE0124
JE0125
JE0126
JE0127
JE0128
JE0129
JE0130
JE0131
JE0132
JE0133
JE0134
JE0135
JE0136
JE0137
JE0138
JE0139
JE0140
JE0141
JE0142
Title/Artist
Congarama - Conga
Descargando - Mambo Latin
Three 2 Samba - Samba
Trio Para Noro - Son Contemp
Trio Uno - Bolero
West Coast Cha-cha - Cha cha cha
Nueva York Mambo - Guaracha La
Pachanga - Pachanga
Funky Son cha - Son Montuno
Gitanita - Rumba Flamen
Good Bye Bossa - Bossa Nova
Dile a Fulana - Son-Montuno
Funky Mambo - Mambo Latin
Songomania - Songo
Las Guajiritas - Guajira
In a Groove - 6.8
La Batidora - Merengue
La Jefa - Guaracha La
El Paname - Danza
Mambo Mulato - Mambo Latin
Minor Details - Mambo Latin
Mi Partido - Partido Alto
Partidido Felicidad - Partido Alto
Sonando - Son Traditi
Samba Rose - Samba
Sabroso - Descarga Sa
Plenera - Plena
Montuneando - Son-Montuno
Mi Cumbia - Cumbia128 Montuneando - Son-Montuno
Merengation - Merengue
Danza for One - Danza
I Got Calypso - Calyspo-son
As We Are Now - Renee Rosnes
Come To Me - Ron Johnston
Donna Lee - Charlie Parker
Blues for Alice - Charlie Parker
Dear Old Stockholm - Charlie Parker
Shaw "Nuff - Charlie Parke
Ornithology - Charlie Parker
Black Diamond - Bill Evans
Hideout - David Sanborn
Maputo - David Sanborn
62
VP Music Library
JAZZ 04 - Piano Solo
GROUP NAME JAZZ04
Display
JS0001
JS0002
JS0003
JS0004
JS0005
JS0006
JS0007
JS0008
JS0009
JS0010
JS0011
JS0012
JS0013
JS0014
JS0015
JS0016
JS0017
JS0018
JS0019
JS0020
JS0021
JS0022
JS0023
JS0024
JS0025
JS0026
JS0027
JS0028
JS0029
JS0030
JS0031
JS0032
JS0033
JS0034
JS0035
JS0036
JS0037
JS0038
JS0039
JS0040
JS0041
JS0042
JS0043
JS0044
JS0045
JS0046
JS0047
JS0048
JS0049
JS0050
Title/Artist
Oh lady be good - Gershwin
Someone to watch over me - Gershwin
The man I love - Gershwin
They can't take that away from me - Gershwin
Nice work if you can get it - Gershwin
I god it bad
Mood Indigo - Duke Allington
Blues for Dr.John - Black, Miles
Boogie Blues - Black, Miles
Don't get around much anymore - Duke Ellington
Hey there - Adler,, Ross
In a Sentimental Mood - Duke Ellington
Prelude to a Kiss - Duke Ellington
Arthur's Theme - Bacharach
Gentle Rain - Bonfa, L.
Ray's Mood - Black, Miles
I left my heart is San Francisco - Cross, cory
Bill Bailey - Canon, H
East of the Sun - Bowman
I'm Walkin - Batholomew
Melancholy Baby - Burn., Norton
Misty - Erroll Garner
Brooklyn - Ganon, O
Jay's Blues - Ganon, O
Search - Ganon, O
Warm - Ganon, O
Santa Marta - Ganon, O
Then came September - Ganon, O
Blue in Green - Davis, Miles
Nardis - Davis, Miles
Begin the Beguine - Porter, Cole
Autumn Leaves - Joseph Kosma
How about you - Freed,,Lane
You go to my head - Gill.,,Goots
Secret Love - Fain,,Webster
Angle Eyes - Dennis, M.
I'll remember April - Raye, Depaul
I can't get started - Duke Vern
New york New york - Ebb,,Kander
Wave - Jobim A.C.
Triste - Jobim A.C.
Indian Summer - Herb., Dubin
A child is born - Jones, Thad
After you've gone - Layton
As time goes by - Hupfield, H.
Poor Butterfly - Hubbell
The way we were - Hamlish, M
Once in a while - Green, Edward
Don't blame me - McHugh, J.
Emily - Mandel, J
63
VP Music Library
JAZZ 05 - Piano Solo
GROUP NAME JAZZ05
Display
JS0051
JS0052
JS0053
JS0054
JS0055
JS0056
JS0057
JS0058
JS0059
JS0060
JS0061
JS0062
JS0063
JS0064
JS0065
JS0066
JS0067
JS0068
JS0069
JS0070
JS0071
JS0072
JS0073
JS0074
JS0075
JS0076
JS0077
JS0078
JS0079
JS0080
JS0081
JS0082
JS0083
JS0084
JS0085
JS0086
JS0087
JS0088
JS0089
JS0090
JS0091
JS0092
JS0093
JS0094
JS0095
JS0096
JS0097
JS0098
JS0099
JS0100
Title/Artist
Grow worm - Lincke
What are you doing the rest of your life - LeGrande, M.
My one and only love - Mellin, Wood
Green dolphin street - Kaper, B.
People - Merill,Styne
Young and foolish - Horw.,Hague
Sweet Georgia Brown (Lou Stein Ver.) - Pinkard
Sweet Georgia Brown (Miles Black Ver.) - Pinkard.B.
Begin the Beguine - Porter, Cole
It's All Right with me - Porter, Cole
Laura (Larry Fuller Ver.) - Raksin, D.
Laura (Ron Johnston Ver.) - Raksin, D.
I could write a Book - Rodgers/Hart
My funny Valentine - Rodgers/Hart
Spring is Here (Version 1) - Rodgers/Hart
Spring is Here (Version 2) - Rodgers/Hart
This can't be Love - Rodgers/Hart
Where or when - Rodgers/Hart
Blues in Bb - Sigerson, C.
Ebb Tide (2 Versions) - Sigman
You made me love me
I should care - Stordahl
Evergreen - Str/Williams
Take the "A" Train (Shris Sigerson Version) - Strayhorn, B
Take the "A" Train (Larry Fuller Version) - Stayhorn, B
Frankie and Johnny - Traditional
Danny boy - Unknown
But Beautiful - Van Heusen
Here's That Rainy Day (Ron Johnston Version) - Van Heusen
Imagination - Van Heusen
Like Someone in Love - Van Heusen
Polka Dots and Moonbeams (Chris Sigerson V) - Van Heusen
Stella by Starlight - Young, V.
The More I see you - Warren, H.
There sill never be another you - Warren, H.
September in the Rain - Warren/Dubin
Can't Help falling in love with you - Weiss/Crea.
When I fall in Love - You./Heyman
Tea for Two - Youm./Caesar
Nine Point Five Blues - Butler, Henry
After Dinner Blues - Butler, Henry
Bar Code Boogie - Butler, Henry
Boogie for Jerry Lee - Butler, Henry
Blue Waltz - Butler, Henry
Do You Really Love me - Butler, Henry
E Pluribus Blunum - Butler, Henry
A Little Naive - Brad Turner
Autumn Nocturnal - Miles Black
Be the One - Miles Black
Mididad - Ron Johnston
64
VP Music Library
JAZZ 06 - Piano Solo
GROUP NAME JAZZ06
Display
JS0101
JS0102
JS0103
JS0104
JS0105
JS0106
JS0107
JS0108
JS0109
JS0110
JS0111
JS0112
JS0113
JS0114
JS0115
JS0116
JS0117
JS0118
JS0119
JS0120
JS0121
JS0122
JS0123
JS0124
JS0125
JS0126
JS0127
JS0128
JS0129
JS0130
JS0131
JS0132
JS0133
JS0134
JS0135
JS0136
Title/Artist
Moon Walk - Miles Black
Out of the Valley - Brad Turner
Tomorrow's Tune - Miles Black
Understanding Standing Under - Miles Black
Native Colours - Renee Rosnes
C Boogie - Doc Fingers
Cakewalk - Doc Fingers
Cal's Shuffle - Doc Fingers
Carl's Blues
Cool Minor - Paquette, D.
Friday Night in the Faubourg - Butler, Henry
Walkin' Home - Doc Fingers
Lucky Sevens - Butler, Henry
Lurchin - Doc Fingers
No Worries - Paquette, D.
Everybody's Havin' Fun - Butler, Henry
Latest Gossip Blues - Butler, Henry
Let Me Be - Butler, Henry
Living Room Waltz - Butler, Henry
Midnight Mambo - Butler, Henry
Mineralogy - Butler, Henry
Sadie Ida & Billie - Paquette, D.
Shades of Booker - Butler, Henry
Steal the Feel - Paquette, D.
Still Young at Fifty - Butler, Henry
The Henry Did It - Butler, henry
The Movin' On Blues - Doc Fingers
The Possum - Paquette, D.
eeny Blues - Doc Fingers
The Mississippi Stomp - Doc Fingers
The Red Light Blues - Doc Fingers
Nutria Suite Blues - Butler, Henry
Sour Milk Boogie - Butler, Henry
Reunion Blues - Butler, Henry
The Shingle Stomp - Doc Fingers
Sweet 46 - Butler, Henry
65
VP Music Library
GOSPEL
GROUP NAME GOSPEL
Display
GE0001
GE0002
GE0003
GE0004
GE0005
GE0006
GE0007
GE0008
GE0009
GE0010
GE0011
GE0012
GE0013
GE0014
GE0015
GE0016
GE0017
GE0018
GE0019
GE0020
GE0021
GE0022
GE0023
GE0024
GE0025
GE0026
GPS0001
GPS0002
GPS0003
GPS0004
GPS0005
GPS0006
GPS0007
GPS0008
GPS0009
GPS0010
GPS0011
GPS0012
GPS0013
GPS0014
GPS0015
GPS0016
GPS0017
GPS0018
GPS0019
GPS0020
GPS0021
Title
Amazing Grace
How Great Thou Art
Holy, Holy, Holy
Oh! Happy Day
Crying in the Chapel
I Believe
Blessed Assurance
He's Got the Whole World in His Hands
What a Friend We Have in Jesus
When the Saints Go Marching In
Abide With Me
Crown Him With Many Crowns
Will the Circle Be Unbroken
I Saw The Light
Just As I Am
Turn, Turn, Turn
Rock of Ages
I Surrender All
Onward Christian Soldiers
Michael Row the Boat Ashore
Swing Low, Sweet Chariot
My Sweet Lord
Wings of a Dove
Savior Like a Shepherd.
Anyway You Bless Me
Awesome God
Amen
Are you washed in the Blood
Day of Redemption
Medley (patriotic, including Truth Marching On)
Praise Him
Silent Night
Trust and Obey
Jesus Loves Me (version 1)
Everytime I feel the spirit
I shall not be moved
Give me that old time religion
God be with you
Great is Thy faithfulness
His eye is on the sparrow
I want to be
Jesus loves me (version2)
Lords prayer
When the saints go marchin' in
Revive us again
Then my living shall not be in vain
What a friend we have in Jesus
66
VP Music Library
HOLIDAY
GROUP NAME HOLIDAY
Display
CAE001
CAE002
CAE003
CAE004
CAE005
CAE006
CAE007
CAE008
CAE009
CAE010
CAE011
CAE012
CAE013
CAE014
CAE015
CAE016
CAE017
CAE018
CAE019
CAE020
CAE021
CAE022
CAE023
CAE024
CAS001
CAS002
CAS003
CAS004
CAS005
CAS006
CAS007
CAS008
CAS009
CAS010
CAS011
CAS012
CAS013
CAS014
Title
God Rest
It's Beginning
Happy X-mas
Silent Night
Ding Dong Merrily
Do You Hear
Santa Claus
Sleigh Ride
The Sleigh Ride
Silver Sleigh Bells
O Tannenbaum
Linus and Lucy
Jolly Jingles
Christmas is Comming
Auld Lang Syne;
Frosty the Snowman;
Hark! The Herald Angels Sing;
Jingle Bell Rock;
Jingle Bells;
Joy to The World;
Let it Snow;
Rudolph The Red Nosed Reindeer;
Silver Bells;
The First Noel.
Good King
Let it Snow
Christmas Tree
Silent Night Version 1
Silent Night Version 2
Silver Bells
Santa Claus is Comin' To Town
Reindeer Rag
I Think of Home and Mother When It's Christmas Time
Have Yourself A Merry Little Christmas
Mistletoe Waltzes
Jingle Bells or the One Horse Open Sleigh
Christmas Chimes
Christmas Bells
67
VP Music Library
CONTEMPORARY MUSIC PIANO 01
GROUP NAME CPiano01
Display
CP01
CP02
CP03
CP04
CP05
CP06
CP07
CP08
CP09
CP10
CP11
CP12
CP13
CP14
CP15
CP16
CP17
CP18
CP19
CP20
CP21
CP22
CP23
CP24
CP25
CP26
CP27
CP28
CP29
CP30
CP31
CP32
CP33
CP34
CP35
CP36
CP37
CP38
CP39
CP40
CP41
CP42
CP43
CP44
CP45
CP46
CP47
CP48
CP49
CP50
Title
Lake louise - Yuki Guramoto
Romance - Yuki Guramoto
A Song from Secret Garden - Secret Garden
Variation on the Canon - Pachelbel
Seol Rae Im - Kim Kwang Min
April Rain
Arizona Trail
Ascencion
Autumn Leaves
Cassandra
Castles
Celtic Skies
Chakra
Cold Horizon
Country Chapel
Destiny
Dreamsong
East of Mauritius
El Escorial
Evening Bells
Faerie
Fairytales
Far Above
Fuchsia
Giants
Gypsy Tears
Highland
Ice Demons
Ireland
Isle of Dreams
Kalahari
Koto
La Pluie
Lake Athabaska
Midnight
Minuet
Moments Linger
New Orleans
Once We Knew the Words
Pomegranate Flower
Prairle Morning
Rainbow Sky
Reflections
Ribbon of Dreams
Rites of Spring
Rooms Within
Sara's Song
Saudi
Sea Voyage
Search
68
VP Music Library
CONTEMPORARY MUSIC PIANO 02
GROUP NAME CPiano02
Display
CP51
CP52
CP53
CP54
CP55
CP56
CP57
CP58
CP59
CP60
CP61
CP62
CP63
CP64
CP65
CP66
CP67
CP68
CP69
CP70
CP71
CP72
CP73
CP74
CP75
Title
Shoji
Skyward
So Long, Miguel
Sophia
Sorceror's Assistant
Spirit Quest
Spring
Spyral Gyral
Sundance
Swan Song
The Promise
The River
The Strand
The Sun Rose Tomorrow
Tibet
Tocatta
Topaz
Totem
Under the Southern Cross
Whirlpools
Winter of Our Love
Within
Celtic Skies
Ice Petals
Country Detour
Original Sound Track
GROUP NAME OST
Display
OSTS01
OSTS02
OSTS03
OSTS04
OSTS05
OSTS06
OSTS07
OSTS08
OSTS09
OSTS10
OSTS11
OSTS12
OSTE01
OSTE02
OSTE03
OSTE04
OSTE05
OSTE06
Title/Artist
Love Afair - Ennio Morricone
A Winter Story - Remedios
Korean film 'Dong Kam' OST - Lee Wook-hyen
Main Title From Return of The Jedi - John Williams
Forrest Gump main title - Alan Silvestri
Truman Sleeps 'the Trueman Show'
The James Bond Theme - Monty Norman
STAR WARS 'The Empire Strikes Back' Main Theme - John Williams
When She Loved Me 'Toy Story 2'
Chariots of Fire Main Theme - Vangelis
Imperial March from 'Star Wars' - John Williams
Love Story
My Heart Will Go On - 'Titanic' OST
Moon river - 'Tiffany's' OST
You Must Love Me - Evita OST - Andrew Lloyd Webber
Bubble Bubble - Game 'Bubble Bubble' Thema
Super Mario - Game 'Super Mario' Thema
007 Thema
69
VP Music Library
Ragtime 1
GROUP NAME RAGTIME1
Display
RAG001
RAG002
RAG003
RAG004
RAG005
RAG006
RAG007
RAG008
RAG009
RAG010
RAG011
RAG012
RAG013
RAG014
RAG015
RAG016
RAG017
RAG018
RAG019
RAG020
RAG021
RAG022
RAG023
RAG024
RAG025
RAG026
RAG027
RAG028
RAG029
RAG030
RAG031
RAG032
RAG033
RAG034
RAG035
RAG036
RAG037
RAG038
RAG039
RAG040
RAG041
RAG042
RAG043
RAG044
RAG045
RAG046
RAG047
RAG048
RAG049
RAG050
Title/Artist
A Breeze From Alabama (1902) - Scott Joplin
Scott Joplin's New Rag (1912) - Scott Joplin
Cleopha - March & Two Step (1902) - Scott Joplin
Searchlight Rag (1907) - Scott Joplin
Elite Syncopations (1902) - Scott Joplin
Fig Leaf Rag (1908) - Scott Joplin
Maple Leaf Rag (1899) - Scott Joplin
Paragon Rag (1909) - Scott Joplin
Reflection Rag (1917) - Scott Joplin
The Entertainer (1902) - Scott Joplin
The Easy Winners (1901) - Scott Joplin
Sugar Cane Rag (1908) - Scott Joplin
Climax Rag (1914) - James Scott
Grace and Beauty (1909) - James Scott
Honey Moon Rag (1916) - James Scott
Ophelia Rag (1910) - James Scott
Peace and Plenty Rag (1919) - James Scott
Paramount Rag (1917) - James Scott
Pegasus - A Classic Rag (1920) - James Scott
Prosperity Rag (1916) - James Scott
Quality - A High Class Rag (1911) - James Scott
Rag Sentimental (1918) - James Scott
Sunburst Rag (1909) - James Scott
The Suffragette Waltz (1914) - James Scott
Victory Rag (1921) - James Scott
Chevy Chase (1914) - James Hubert (Eubie) Blake
The Charleston Rag (1899.1917) - James Hubert (Eubie) Blake
Contentment Rag (1915) - Joseph Lamb
Cum Bac Rag (1911) - Charles L. Johnson
Dill Pickles Rag (1906) - Charles L. Johnson
Powder Rag (1908) - Charles L. Johnson
Sweetness Rag (1912) - Charles L. Johnson
Frog-I-More Rag (1918) - Ferdinand(Jelly-Roll) Morton
Original Jelly Roll Blues (1915) - Ferdinand(Jelly-Roll) Morton
The Black Cat Rag (1905) - Frank Wooster&Ethyl B.Smith
A Ragtime Nightmare (1900) - Tom Turpin
Harlem Rag (1897) - Tom Turpin
Pan Am Rag (1914) - Tom Turpin
The Saint Louis Rag (1903) - Tom Turpin
Reindeer Rag (1915) - Joseph Lamb
Sensation - A Rag (1908) - Joseph Lamb
Top Liner Rag (1916) - Joseph Lamb
American Beauty Rag (1913) - Joseph Lamb
Bohemia Rag (1919) - Joseph Lamb
Champagne Rag (1910) - Joseph Lamb
Cleopatra Rag (1915) - Joseph Lamb
The Smiler (1907) - Percy Wenrich
The Thriller! Rag (1909) - May Aufderheide
Tickled to Death (1899) - Charles Hunter
Castle House Rag (1914) - James Reese Europe
70
VP Music Library
Ragtime 2
GROUP NAME RAGTIME2
Display
Title/Artist
RAG051
RAG052
RAG053
RAG054
RAG055
RAG056
RAG057
RAG058
RAG059
RAG060
RAG061
RAG062
RAG063
RAG064
RAG065
RAG066
RAG067
RAG068
RAG069
RAG070
RAG071
RAG072
RAG073
RAG074
RAG075
Cataract Rag (1914) - Robert Hampton
Chicken Chowder (1905) - Irene Giblin
Dengozo (Brazilian Maxixe) (1914) - Ernesto Nazareth
Desecration (Rag Humoresque) (1914) - Felix Arndt
Dusty Rag (1908) - May Aufderheide
Felix Rag (1910) - H.H.McSkimming
Greenwich Witch (1921) - Zez Confrey
Holy Moses Rag by Cy Seymour
Hot House Rag (1914) - paul Pratt
Jungle Time Rag (1909) - E.Philip Severin
Key-Stone Rag (1921) - Willie Anderson
Kinklets, Two Step (1906) - Arthur Marshall
Kitten on the Keys (1921) - Zez Confrey
That Demon Rag by Russell Smith (1912)
Pasquinade (caprice) by Louis Moreau Gottschalk (1870)
Pianoflage by Roy Bargy (1922)
Possum Rag by Geraldyne Dobyns (1907)
Russian Rag (Rockies Rag) by George L. Cobb (1918)
Sapho Rag by J. Russel Robinson (1909)
Sleepy Hollow Rag by Clarence Woods (1918)
The Black and White Rag by George Botsford(1908)
Majestic Rag by Ben Rawls & Royal Neel (1914)
The Lion Tamer Rag by Mark Janza (1913)
Twelfth Street Rag by Euday L. Bowman (1914)
Wild Cherries Rag by Ted Snyder (1908)
WEDDING
GROUP NAME WEDDING
Display
WED001
WED002
WED003
WED004
WED005
WED006
WED007
Title/Artist
Brautchor - Wilhelm Richard Wagner
Hochzeitsmarsch - Jakob Ludwig Felix Mendelssohn-Bartholdy
Brindisi - Giuseppe Fortunio Francesco Verdi
Jingle1 - Kouichi Hashimoto
Jingle2 - Kouichi Hashimoto
Fanfare1
Fanfare2
CHILDRESN'S
GROUP NAME CHILDREN
Display
CHR01
CHR02
CHR03
CHR04
CHR05
CHR06
CHR07
CHR08
CHR09
CHR10
CHR11
CHR12
Title
The Ants Go Marching
Baa, Baa, Black Sheep
Bingo
Humpty Dumpty
Hush Little Baby
It's Raining, It's Pouring
Itsy Bitsy Spider
Jack & Jill
London Bridge
Little Bo-Beep
Mary Had A Little Lamb
Old MacDonald Had a Farm
71
Hilfe bei Störungen
Bitte überprüfen Sie anhand der folgenden Tabelle die aufgeführten Punkte, wenn Sie
Probleme bei der Bedienung des Pianos haben.
Problem
Ursache
Lösung
Kein Sound
1. Problem mit der
Stromversorgung
2. Lautstärke zu niedrig
eingestellt
3. Es sind Kopfhörer
angeschlossen
1. Überprüfen Sie das Netzteil und
seine Verbindungen
2. Drehen Sie die Lautstärke etwas
höher
3. Stecken Sie die Kopfhörer aus
Gelegentliche
Interferenzen
Kühlschrank,
Waschmaschine oder
ähnliche Geräte
Schließen Sie solche Geräte nicht
an die selbe Steckdose an,
sondern soweit als möglich entfernt
Kein Sound, wenn ein
externer Verstärker
angeschlossen ist
1. Lautstärke zu niedrig
2. Defektes
Verbindungskabel
1. Passen Sie die Lautstärke an
2. Ersetzen Sie das Kabel
Spezifikationen
Sektion
Inhalt
Produkt
High Performance Stage Piano
Tastatur
88-Tasten, Standardtastatur, 7 1/4 Oktaven
Anschlagssensitivität
Off/Hard 1, 2, 3/Soft 1, 2, 3/Normal 1, 2, 3
Max. Polyphonie
128 Noten
Sound
General MIDI 128 Voice, 7 Drum-Kits, 1 Sound EffektSet
Begleitautomatik - Styles
80 Rhythmus-Styles
Begleitautomatik - Modi
Single Finger, Fingered, Full Keyboard
Begleitautomatik - Regler
Start/Stop, Intro/Ending, Fill1/Sync, Fill2/Sync
Funktionen
Layer, Split, Tune, Transpose
Registration
5 Speicherplätze
Digitale Effekte
4 Chorus, 4 Reverb
Metronom
ja
Sektion
Inhalt
Display
Graphisches LCD-Display
VP-Songs
über 1000
Aufnahme
Echtzeit, 2 Spure, max. 10.000 Noten pro Spur
Lautstärke
Gesamtlautstärke, Begleitautomatik, Layer, Split
Anschlüsse
SD-Kartenslot, MIDI IN/OUT, USB IN, 2 Pedale IN, 2
Kophhörerbuchsen
Lautsprecher
2 Inches x 6 (Stereo 2 x 20 W)
Stromversorgung
DC IN, 15 V, 4 A
Stromverbrauch
20 W
Abmessungen
1340 x 350 x 140 mm
Gewicht
17,5 kg
Zubehör
Bedienungsanleitung, SD-Karte, Notenständer, Netzteil,
Pedal
Herstellererklärung
Garantie und Gewährleistung
Neben der gesetzlichen 24 monatigen Gewährleistungsfrist übernehmen wir eine Garantie
von 6 Monaten. Die Garantiezeit beginnt ab dem Datum des Kaufs von fabrikneuen
ungebrauchten Produkten durch den erstmaligen Endkunden. Zum Nachweis heben Sie
bitte unbedingt den Kaufbeleg auf. Ohne diesen Nachweis, die der zuständige ServicePartner prüft, werden Reparaturen grundsätzlich kostenpflichtig durchgeführt. Auf dem
Kaufbeleg müssen das Kaufdatum und die Bezeichnung des Produkts angegeben sein.
Die Garantie-Leistungen bestehen nach unserer Wahl in der unentgeltlichen Beseitigung
von Material- oder Herstellungsfehlern durch Reparatur, Austausch von Teilen oder des
kompletten Geräts. Die im Rahmen eines Garantiefalls aus einem Produkt entfernten
defekten Teile gehen in das Eigentum des Herstellers oder dessen Service-Partner
zurück.
Ausgenommen von der Garantie sind:
 unwesentliche Fehler oder Abweichungen in der Beschaffenheit des Produkts, die
für Wert und bestimmungsmäßigen Gebrauch unerheblich sind,
 dem Produkt beigefügte Zubehörartikel, Akkus und Batterien (diese Produkte haben
wegen ihrer Beschaffenheit eine kürzere Lebensdauer, die zudem im Einzelfall
konkret von ihrer Nutzungsintensität abhängt),
 Mängel durch unsachgemäßen Gebrauch (z. B. Bedienungsfehler, mechanische
Beschädigungen, falsche Betriebsspannung), (Unter sachgemäßem Gebrauch ist
die Verwendung des Produkts unter den Bedingungen zu verstehen, die in der
Betriebsanleitung beschrieben sind.)
 Mängel durch Verschleiß, von Ihnen oder Dritten vorgenommene Modifikationen an
den Produkten, wenn über Art und Umfang der Modifizierung keine vorherige
schriftliche Zustimmung des Herstellers vorliegt,
 Mängel aufgrund höherer Gewalt,
 Mängel, die Ihnen beim Kauf bereits bekannt sind
 Der Garantieanspruch erlischt bei Eingriffen in das Produkt durch nicht autorisierte
Personen oder Werkstätten.
Im Garantiefall senden Sie das Gerät inklusive Zubehör und Kaufbeleg an den für Sie
zuständigen Service-Partner oder direkt an das Musikhaus Kirstein. Das Risiko der
erfolgreichen Zusendung liegt beim Kunden. Zur Vermeidung von Transportschäden sollte
möglichst die Original-Verpackung verwendet werden.
Konformitätserklärung
Dieses Produkt entspricht den grundlegenden Anforderungen und den
weiteren folgender Richtlinien:
 2004/108/EU EMV-Richtlinie
 2006/95EU Niederspannungsrichtlinie
Die vollständige Konformitätserklärung kann unter
http://www.kirstein.de/docs/konformitaetserklaerungen eingesehen werden
Akkus und Batterien
Die mitgelieferten Akkus oder Batterien sind recyclingfähig. Bitte entsorgen Sie die
Akkus über den Batteriecontainer oder den Fachhandel. Entsorgen Sie nur leere
Batterien oder Akkus, um den Umweltschutz zu gewährleisten.
WEEE-Erklärung
Ihr Produkt wurde mit hochwertigen Materialien und Komponenten entworfen
und hergestellt, die recycelbar sind und wieder verwendet werden können.
Dieses Symbol bedeutet, dass elektrische und elektronische Geräte am Ende
ihrer Nutzungsdauer vom Hausmüll getrennt entsorgt werden müssen. Bitte
entsorgen Sie dieses Gerät bei Ihrer örtlichen kommunalen Sammelstelle oder
im Recycling Center. Bitte helfen Sie mit, die Umwelt, in der wir leben, zu
erhalten.